Palm 755p User Guide

User Guide
Your Palm® Treo™ 755P Smartphone
Intellectual property notices
© 2005–2007 Palm, Inc. All rights reserved. Blazer, HotSync, Palm,
Palm Desktop, Palm OS, Treo, VersaMail, and the Palm and Treo
logos are among the trademarks or registered trademarks owned by
or licensed to Palm, Inc. Documents To Go is a trademark or
registered trademark of DataViz, Inc. Adobe and Acrobat are either
registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated
in the United States and/or other countries. Microsoft, ActiveSync,
Excel, Outlook, PowerPoint and Vista are either registered
trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United
States and/or other countries. All other brand and product names are
or may be trademarks of, and are used to identify products or
services of, their respective owners.
This product is protected by one or more of the following United
States patents:
6,976,226; 6,975,304; 6,965,375; 6,961,567; 6,961,029; 6,957,397;
6,952,571; 6,950,988; 6,947,975; 6,947,017; 6,943,667; 6,940,490;
6,924,752; 6,907,233; 6,906,701; 6,906,741; 6,901,276; 6,850,780;
6,845,408; 6,842,628; 6,842,335; 6,831,662; 6,819,552; 6,804,699;
6,795,710; 6,788,285; 6,781,824; 6,781,575; 6,766,490; 6,745,047;
6,744,451; 6,738,852; 6,732,105; 6,724,720; 6,721,892; 6,712,638;
6,708,280; 6,697,639; 6,687,839; 6,685,328; 6,665,803; 6,618,044;
6,590,588; 6,539,476; 6,532,148; 6,523,124; 6,519,141; 6,516,202;
6,490,155; 6,480,146; 6,457,134; 6,456,247; 6,442,637; 6,441,824;
6,437,543; 6,429,625; 6,425,087; 6,389,572; 6,388,877; 6,381,650;
6,363,082; 6,344,848; 6,317,085; 6,241,537; 6,222,857; 6,185,423;
6,147,314; 6,115,248; 6,064,342; D421,251; D429,252; D466,128;
D478,091. Patent pending.
NetFront Communications, Inc. in the United States of America and
is used under a license. A portion of this software includes software
modules developed by the Independent JPEG Group.
Disclaimer and limitation of liability
Palm, Inc. and its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage
or loss resulting from the use of this guide. Palm, Inc. and its
suppliers assume no responsibility for any loss or claims by third
parties that may arise through the use of this software. Palm, Inc. and
its suppliers assume no responsibility for any damage or loss caused
by deletion of data as a result of malfunction, dead battery, or repairs.
Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media
to protect against data loss.
Palm Take Back and Recycling Program
As part of Palm’s corporate commitment to be a good steward of the
environment, we strive to use environmentally friendly materials,
reduce waste, and develop the highest standards in electronics
recycling. Our recycling program keeps Palm handheld devices, Treo
smartphones, and mobile companions out of landfills through
evaluation and disposition for reuse and recycling.
Palm customers may participate in the recycling program free of
charge. Visit www.palm.com/recycle or in the US call 877-869-7256
for additional details and information about how you can help reduce
electronic waste.
Waste disposal
This product also is licensed under United States patent 6,058,304.
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of
Microsoft Corporation. Use or distribution of such technology outside
of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an
authorized Microsoft subsidiary.
This product contains ACCESS Co., Ltd.’s NetFront 3.0 Internet
browser software. © 1996-2007 ACCESS Co., Ltd. and ACCESS
Systems America, Inc. NetFront is the trademark or registered
trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and in other countries except
the United States of America. NetFront is a registered trademark of
This symbol indicates that Palm products should be recycled and not
be disposed of in unsorted municipal waste. Palm products should be
sent to a facility that properly recycles electrical and electronic
equipment. For information on environmental programs visit:
www.palm.com/environment.
PN: 406-11104-00
v. 1.0
Contents
Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What’s in the box? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
What do I need to get started? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Where to learn more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Chapter 1: Setting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Smartphone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Charging the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Maximizing battery life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Setting up your computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Chapter 2: Moving around on your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Chapter 3: Your phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Turning your smartphone on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
What can I do when I’m on a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Using a phone headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
CONTENTS
iii
Customizing phone settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Chapter 4: Your email and other messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Which application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
The VersaMail® application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Chapter 5: Your connections to the web and wireless devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Connections with Bluetooth® devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Chapter 6: Your photos, videos, and music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Camera and Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Pics & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Pocket Tunes™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Chapter 7: Your personal information organizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Chapter 8: Your memos and documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Documents To Go® Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Memos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Voice Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Chapter 9: Your application and info management tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
iv
CONTENTS
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Sending information with Bluetooth® wireless technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Chapter 10: Your personal settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
System sound settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Chapter 11: Common questions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Upgrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Desktop software installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Making room on your Treo™ smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
CONTENTS
v
Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Important safety and legal information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
vi
CONTENTS
Welcome
Congratulations on the purchase of your
Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone! In one
compact and indispensable device, you
now have all of the following:
NOTE Phone and text messaging services
require a service contract with your
wireless service provider. Web and email
services require a service contract and
high-speed data service from your wireless
service provider. Data speeds vary based
on network availability and capacity.
•
An advanced mobile smartphone
•
Mobile email (corporate and personal)
What’s in the box?
•
High-speed Internet connection and
data transfer with 1xRTT and EVDO
support
You should have received all the following
items in the Treo smartphone box:
•
Palm OS® organizer applications
Hardware
Organizer applications: The
Calendar, Contacts, Tasks, and Memos
applications are collectively referred to as
organizer or PIM (personal information
manager) applications.
KEY TERM
•
Treo smartphone
•
Rechargeable battery
•
AC charger with international adapter(s)
(if required in your region)
•
USB sync cable
•
Stereo headset
•
Expansion capability (miniSD)
•
A 1.3-megapixel digital camera
•
Text messaging
Documentation and software
•
A media player
•
Read This First booklet
Productivity software
•
Quick Reference
•
This guide helps you set up your Treo
smartphone and learn to use it.
WELCOME
1
•
Palm Software Installation CD, which
includes the following:
•
Palm® Desktop software
•
Links to bonus software for your
smartphone
•
User Guide (this guide)
•
User Guide for the VersaMail®
Application
•
The computer with which you want to
synchronize your personal information
•
The Palm Software Installation CD
included in the box
Where to learn more
•
Palm warranty
For a quick introduction
•
Software license agreement
Quick Tour: Introduces you to many of your
What do I need to
get started?
smartphone’s features. You can open it
any time. Press Applications
, and then
select Quick Tour
.
While using your Treo smartphone
On-device User Guide: A specially formatted
As you work through the instructions in this
guide, you’ll need all the items that came in
the Treo 755P smartphone box (see What’s
in the box?), as well as the following:
2
•
An activated account with your wireless
service provider
•
A location with wireless coverage for
your smartphone
•
An electrical outlet
WELCOME
version of this guide, available right on your
smartphone. To open the on-device guide,
press Applications
, select My Treo
, select the Support tab, and then select
User Guide.
Tips: Many of the built-in applications include
tips for getting the most out of your
smartphone. Some tips are available from a
menu: open an application, press Menu
,
select Options, and then select Tips. Other
tips are available when you select a Tips
icon in the upper-right corner of a dialog box.
retailers (look in the computers section), or
visit http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.
Online support from Palm: For up-to-date
Online forums: Consult online Treo device
downloads, troubleshooting, and support
information, go to
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.
user discussion groups to swap information
and learn about topics you may find nowhere
else. For details, visit http://go.palm.com/
treo755p/.
If you need more information
Windows Vista™ users: For information on
using your smartphone and desktop software
with Windows Vista, visit www.palm.com/
windowsvista.
Books: Many books about Palm OS® devices
are available from local or online book
Customer service from your wireless
service provider: For questions about your
mobile account or features, contact your
wireless service provider’s technical
support department or your wireless
service provider’s customer service and
billing department.
WELCOME
3
4
WELCOME
C H A PT ER
1
Setting up
You’re about to discover the many things about your
Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone that will help you better
manage your life and have fun, too.
As you become more familiar with your smartphone, you’ll
want to personalize the settings and add applications to make it
uniquely yours. But first, take these few easy steps to set up.
Benefits
•
Know where your smartphone
controls are located
•
Start using your smartphone right
away
•
Establish a link between your
smartphone and your computer
In this chapter
Smartphone overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Installing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Charging the battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Making your first call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Setting up your computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Synchronizing information—the basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
Smartphone overview
Front view
Indicator light (phone
and charge indicator)
Earpiece
5-way navigator and
Center button
Power/End
Applications
Menu
Volume button
Side button
Email
Send
Phone
Option
Protect your screen. Be careful to store
your smartphone away from items that might
scratch or crush the screen. Visit http://
go.palm.com/treo755p/ to find carrying cases
and other useful accessories.
TIP
Calendar
DID YOU KNOW? The indicator light is visible
only when the light is on.
DID YOU KNOW? When your smartphone screen
is on, you can press and hold the Side button
to open an application of your choice; see
Reassigning buttons for details.
SMARTPHONE OVERVIEW
7
CHAPTER
1
SETTING UP
Back view
Speaker
Self-portrait mirror
Camera lens
Stylus
Battery door release
Infrared
(IR) port
MiniSD
expansion card
slot
Headset jack
Microphone
IMPORTANT The Treo smartphone
speaker includes a large magnet, so be
sure to keep your smartphone away from
credit cards or other items that could be
demagnetized.
8
SMARTPHONE OVERVIEW
Multi-connector
Installing the battery
Top view
Sound On
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
Sound Off
1 Press the battery door release, and
slide the battery door downward to
remove it from your smartphone.
Ringer switch
DID YOU KNOW? The Ringer switch silences all
sounds, including music, at once; you don’t
need to hunt for “off” or “mute” settings in
individual applications.
Battery door
release
2 Align the metal contacts on the battery
with the contacts inside the battery
compartment.
3 Insert the battery into the compartment
at a 45-degree angle, and then press it
into place.
INSTALLING THE BATTERY
9
SETTING UP
CHAPTER
1
Battery
contacts
Smartphone
contacts
If your smartphone does not turn on, you
need to connect it to the AC charger. If it still
does not turn on after you connect the AC
charger, then do a soft reset. See Performing
a soft reset.
TIP
Charging the battery
4 Slide the battery door onto the back of
the smartphone until it clicks into place.
5 When the language selection screen
appears, select the language you want
to use.
IMPORTANT You must select the same
language on your smartphone and desktop
software.
6 Follow the onscreen instructions to set
up your smartphone.
10
CHARGING THE BATTERY
The battery comes with a sufficient charge
to complete the setup process and activate
your phone. After activation, we
recommend charging your smartphone for
3.5 hours (or until the indicator light is solid
green) to give it a full charge. See
Maximizing battery life for tips on
maximizing the life of your smartphone’s
battery.
To avoid draining the battery, charge your
smartphone every day, especially if you use
your phone often.
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? If your battery ever becomes
fully drained, your info is still stored safely on
your smartphone until you recharge the
battery or connect your smartphone to a
power source.
1 If necessary, connect the international
adapter to the AC charger plug.
2 Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
3 Connect the charger cable to the
bottom of the smartphone. Make sure
the arrow on the connector is facing up,
toward the screen.
DID YOU KNOW? You can also charge your
smartphone by connecting it to your computer
with the sync cable. You can do this with or
without using the charger cable (see
Connecting your Treo smartphone to your
computer).
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
Keep in mind that it takes longer to charge the
battery using the sync cable, and if your laptop
isn’t plugged into a power source, it can drain
the laptop’s battery.
4 To confirm that your smartphone is
charging, check the indicator light on
your smartphone.
•
Solid red indicates that your
smartphone is charging.
•
Solid green indicates that your
smartphone is fully charged.
Indicator light
CHARGING THE BATTERY
11
CHAPTER
1
SETTING UP
If the battery is fully drained, it may take a
few moments for the indicator light to turn on
when you begin charging.
TIP
If the indicator light doesn’t turn on when
you connect your smartphone to the AC
charger, double-check the cable connection
and the electrical outlet to which it is
connected.
TIP
To see exactly how much power is left in
your battery, tap the onscreen battery icon.
TIP
Battery icon
When your smartphone is on (see Turning
your phone on and off), the onscreen
battery icon displays the charging status:
A red lightning bolt indicates that
the battery is connected to a wall
outlet and is charging.
A green lightning bolt indicates
that the battery is connected to a
wall outlet and is fully charged.
A partial battery without a
lightning bolt indicates that the
battery is not connected to a wall
outlet and it has some power.
An almost empty battery that is
red at the bottom indicates that
you need to charge the battery
immediately.
12
MAXIMIZING BATTERY LIFE
Maximizing battery
life
Battery life depends on how you use your
smartphone. You can maximize the life of
your battery by following a few easy
guidelines:
DID YOU KNOW? You can buy an extra battery
as a spare for long airplane trips or periods
of heavy use. To purchase batteries that are
compatible with your smartphone, go to
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.
•
•
Charge your smartphone whenever
you’re at your desk, or charge it
overnight. The Li-ion battery has a much
longer useful life when it is topped off
frequently, versus charging it after it is
fully drained.
Your smartphone’s wireless features
(phone, email, messaging, and web)
and media features (camera, media
players, eBooks, and games) consume
more power than its organizer features.
If you spend a lot of time using the
wireless and media features, keep an
eye on the battery icon and charge
when necessary.
•
If you don’t plan to use the wireless
features on your smartphone for a
while, turn off your phone (see Turning
your phone on and off) and let all calls
be picked up by voicemail.
•
As with any mobile phone, if you are in
an area with no wireless coverage, your
smartphone searches for a signal, which
consumes power. If you cannot move to
an area of better coverage, temporarily
turn off your phone. While your phone is
off, you can continue to use your
smartphone’s nonwireless features.
•
Turn down the screen brightness (see
Adjusting the brightness).
•
Decrease the settings in Power
Preferences and turn off Beam Receive
(see Optimizing power settings).
•
Turn off the Bluetooth® feature if you’re
not using it. See Connecting to a
Bluetooth hands-free device.
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
Making your first call
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If Phone Off
appears in the title bar, you need to turn on
your phone (see Turning your phone on and
off). If No Service appears in the title bar,
you are outside a wireless coverage area. If
you believe you are in a wireless coverage
area and this problem persists, contact
your wireless service provider for
assistance.
1 Press Phone
.
2 If prompted, press Center
to turn
off Keyguard (see Locking your keyboard
(Keyguard) for more info).
MAKING YOUR FIRST CALL
13
CHAPTER
1
SETTING UP
3 If you haven’t already activated your phone,
follow your wireless service provider’s
activation steps before continuing.
4 Tap the onscreen Dial Pad to enter the
number you want to call.
•
To increase the volume, press the upper
half of the Volume button.
•
To decrease the volume, press the
lower half of the Volume button.
Volume button
5 Press Send
to dial.
6 After you finish the call, press Power/
End
to end the call.
You can also dial phone numbers with the
number pad on the keyboard. See Dialing
using the keyboard for details.
TIP
Adjusting call volume
While a call is in progress, press the
Volume button on the side of your
smartphone to adjust the call volume.
14
MAKING YOUR FIRST CALL
What’s my phone number?
1 Make sure your phone is on (see
Turning your phone on and off).
2 Press Phone
3 Press Menu
.
.
4 Select Options, and then select Phone
Info.
Look here for
your phone
number
If your phone number doesn’t appear in
Phone Info, turn your phone off and on again
before you recheck Phone Info. If your phone
number still doesn’t appear, contact your
wireless service provider to confirm that your
phone has been activated.
TIP
Synchronization means you can enter or
change info on your smartphone or on your
computer and then sync to automatically
update the info in both places. There’s no
need to enter the info twice. We strongly
recommend that you sync your
smartphone with your computer frequently
to keep your info up-to-date (and backed
up) in both locations.
System requirements
Your computer should meet the following
minimum system profiles:
•
Setting up your
computer
•
You need to install the desktop software
and connect the sync cable so that you can
synchronize the info on your computer and
the info on your smartphone. You can use
either Palm® Desktop software (included)
or Microsoft Outlook® for Windows (sold
separately) as your desktop software.
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
Windows 2000, XP Service Pack 2 or
Windows Media Center Edition 2005
•
32MB of available memory (RAM)
•
170MB of free hard disk space
•
CD drive
•
Available USB port
Mac OS X version 10.2 or later
•
128MB of total memory (RAM)
•
190MB of free hard disk space
•
CD drive
•
Available USB port
SETTING UP YOUR COMPUTER
15
CHAPTER
1
SETTING UP
Windows XP users: To sync your info, you
must install Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your smartphone—even if you
sync with Outlook (sold separately) or
another third-party application.
Windows Vista users: Before inserting
the Palm Software Installation CD, go to
www.palm.com/windowsvista where you’ll
find instructions and information about
using your smartphone and desktop
software with Windows Vista.
Upgrading from another Palm OS® device
NOTE If you are setting up your first Palm
OS device, skip ahead to Connecting your
Treo smartphone to your computer.
You can transfer all compatible applications
and information from your previous Palm
OS® device to your new Treo 755P
smartphone. This includes your calendar
events, contacts, memos, and tasks, as
well as your application settings and any
compatible third-party applications
and files.
16
SETTING UP YOUR COMPUTER
When you install the desktop software
from the Palm Software Installation CD,
some third-party applications may be
quarantined because they are not
compatible with the Palm OS software
version 5.4.9 on your new Treo
smartphone. Quarantined files are not
installed on your smartphone, nor are they
deleted; these files are placed in a new
folder on your computer: C:\Program
Files\Palm\device name\PalmOS5
Incompatible Apps. (On some systems
Palm may be replaced with palmOne or
Handspring.)
If you have third-party applications on the
device you are upgrading from, you may want
to review the info in Upgrading that lists the
kinds of apps you do not want to try to install
on your new device. The info in Upgrading is
also useful if you run into other problems
during the upgrade process.
TIP
Some third-party utilities allow you to back
up your old device’s information onto an
expansion card and then transfer the info to
your Treo 755P smartphone. We do not
recommend this method because any
incompatible applications are also transferred
to your smartphone.
TIP
1 Calculate how much space your apps
and info occupy on your previous Palm
OS device:
•
From Applications View, open the
menus.
•
Select Info on the App menu.
•
At the bottom of the screen, select
Size.
•
Look at the numbers on the Free
Space line and subtract the number
on the left from the number on the
right to calculate the space used. For
example, on the device shown here,
22.4 – 17.5 = 4.9. This means that
4.9MB of space is occupied on this
device.
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
2 If the space occupied on your previous
device is 60MB or less, then go to
step 3. If the space occupied is greater
than 60MB, then do any of the following
to reduce the storage space you’re
using before you go to the next step:
•
Delete any third-party applications
that you no longer use.
•
Move large files, such as eBooks and
images, to an expansion card.
•
Move third-party applications to an
expansion card.
•
Purge old info in applications such as
Calendar (Date Book), Tasks (To Do),
and email. Refer to the
documentation that came with your
previous device for instructions on
these items.
SETTING UP YOUR COMPUTER
17
CHAPTER
1
SETTING UP
MAC ONLY If you have pictures on your
4 Install the desktop synchronization
software from your new Palm Software
Installation CD (see Installing the
desktop synchronization software).
previous device, copy them from your
previous device to an expansion card or
beam them to your new Treo 755P
smartphone.
IMPORTANT Do not synchronize your new
Treo 755P smartphone with any previous
versions of Palm Desktop software.
6 If you plan to continue using your
previous device, perform a hard reset to
remove its associated device name.
(See the documentation that came with
your previous device for instructions on
performing a hard reset.) Each device
you synchronize with your computer
must have a unique name. The next
time you synchronize your previous
device with your computer, be sure to
assign it a new name.
5 During the installation process, sync
your new Treo smartphone with your
new desktop software as instructed.
When prompted, do the following:
18
in the User list in Palm Desktop
software.)
3 Synchronize your previous device with
your previous desktop software to back
up your information one last time.
•
Connect your new smartphone to
your computer (see Connecting your
Treo smartphone to your computer).
•
Indicate whether you want to sync
only the info in your PIM apps
(Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and
Tasks) or all info and apps (excluding
apps known to be incompatible).
•
Select a device name for your new
smartphone; be sure to select the
same name that you used for your old
device. (This is the name that appears
SETTING UP YOUR COMPUTER
If any third-party applications are
quarantined during the installation, do not
manually install them. Contact the
third-party developer for software updates
and info about compatibility with your Treo
755P smartphone.
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
Installing the desktop synchronization
software
IMPORTANT Even if you already own a
Palm OS device and have installed a
previous version of the desktop software,
you must install the software from the
Palm Software Installation CD that came
with your Treo 755P smartphone.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN If you are installing
on a computer at work, make sure your
computer is configured to let you install
new software. Contact your company’s
IT department for help.
If you want to sync info with applications
other than Palm Desktop or Microsoft
Outlook, you need to purchase additional
third-party sync software. This sync software
is sometimes called a conduit.
TIP
1 Close any apps that are running on your
computer, including those that are
minimized. Your computer needs all its
resources to install the software.
2 Insert the Palm Software Installation CD
into the CD drive on your computer.
3 If you are installing on a Mac,
double-click the CD icon on the desktop,
and then double-click the
PalmSoftware.pkg icon.
4 When the installation wizard opens,
follow the onscreen instructions. Please
note these important points about the
installation process:
•
When the language selection screen
appears, click the same language you
selected on your smartphone.
•
You can choose which desktop
software you want to use for
synchronization: Palm Desktop
software or Microsoft Outlook.
SETTING UP YOUR COMPUTER
19
CHAPTER
1
SETTING UP
To download a trial version of Microsoft
Outlook and learn about discount offers go to:
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.
TIP
NOTE If you use Microsoft Outlook as your
desktop email application, select Microsoft
Outlook as your desktop synchronization
software. If you select Microsoft Outlook,
Palm Desktop software will still be installed
on your computer. When you enter
information on your computer, be sure to
enter your information in Microsoft
Outlook, not in Palm Desktop software.
•
When the install process prompts you
to connect your smartphone to your
computer, go to the next section,
Connecting your Treo smartphone to
your computer.
3 Plug the USB sync cable into an
available USB port or into a powered
USB hub on your computer.
For best performance, plug your sync
cable directly into a USB port on your
computer. If your computer has USB ports on
both the front and back, we suggest using the
back port; the front port is often a low-power
port. If you use a USB hub, make sure the
hub has its own power supply.
TIP
4 With the sync button facing up, connect
the sync cable to the bottom of your
smartphone. Do not press the sync
button until you are instructed to do so.
5 Connect the charger cable to the
bottom of your smartphone.
Connecting your Treo smartphone to your
computer
1 If necessary, connect the international
adapter to the AC charger plug.
2 Plug the AC charger into a wall outlet.
Sync
cable
Sync
button
20
SETTING UP YOUR COMPUTER
You are now ready to synchronize; go to
Synchronizing information—the basics.
corporate server frequently to keep your
info up-to-date (and backed up) in
both locations.
Synchronizing
information—the
basics
The info from all the following applications
is updated by default each time you sync
your smartphone with your desktop
software:
Synchronizing means that info that is
entered or updated in one place
(your smartphone or your computer) is
automatically updated in the other, so
there’s no need to enter the info twice. We
strongly recommend that you sync your
smartphone with your computer or
1
CHAPTER
SETTING UP
How each application syncs depends on
your computer type and the desktop
software you are using, as follows:
Computer type
Desktop type
What syncs and where
Windows
Microsoft
Outlook (sold
separately)
•
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, and Tasks
sync with Outlook
•
Pics&Videos syncs with Palm Desktop
software
Windows
Palm Desktop
software
All apps sync with Palm Desktop software
Mac
Palm Desktop
software
All apps sync with Palm Desktop software
SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION—THE BASICS
21
CHAPTER
1
SETTING UP
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To sync your info,
you must install Palm Desktop software
from the Palm Software Installation CD
that came with your Treo 755P
smartphone—even if you sync with
Outlook (sold separately) or another
third-party application. See Installing the
desktop synchronization software for
instructions.
1 Connect your Treo 755P smartphone to
your computer (see Connecting your
Treo smartphone to your computer).
NOTE If you’re performing initial setup,
your smartphone should already be
connected to your computer.
2 Press the sync button on the sync
cable.
3 A message indicates that
synchronization is in progress.
4 Wait for a message that indicates that
the process is complete before you
disconnect the sync cable.
If you have problems synchronizing, see
Synchronization for suggestions.
TIP
For more sync options, including which
apps sync, see Synchronizing information—
advanced.
TIP
If you’re finishing your initial setup, you
now have the option to install bonus
software. If you choose to install some of
the bonus software, you need to sync
again to install the software on your
smartphone. You can also install bonus
software later; see Installing applications.
For info on locating your pictures and
videos on your computer, see Viewing
pictures and videos on your computer.
TIP
Sync button
22
SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION—THE BASICS
C H A PT ER
2
Moving around on your
smartphone
Have you ever been to a new city and felt a bit lost until you
figured out that the numbered streets run north/south and the
avenues run east/west? Learning to move around on your
smartphone is similar. Most Palm OS® applications use the
same set of controls. So once you learn how to use these
controls on your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone, you’ll be
driving all over town and you won’t even need a map.
Benefits
•
Find and open applications quickly
•
Access extra features with menus
•
Move around in applications with
one hand, using the 5-way
navigator
•
Access many more characters and
symbols than are displayed on the
keyboard
In this chapter
Moving around the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Using the keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Opening applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Moving around the
screen
To move around the Treo 755P smartphone
screen, you can use the 5-way navigator for
one-handed navigation, or you can tap
items on the screen with the stylus. With
use, you will find your own favorite way to
scroll, highlight, and select menu items.
Some third-party applications may not
work with the 5-way navigator, and you must
use the stylus instead.
TIP
2
CHAPTER
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
DID YOU KNOW? In this guide, we use arrow
icons to indicate directions on the 5-way.
These are different from any onscreen arrows
that you tap with your stylus or select with
the 5-way to display pick lists.
The 5-way includes the following buttons:
Center
Up
Left
Right
Down
MOVING AROUND THE SCREEN
25
CHAPTER
2
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
Up
or Down
at a time.
Scrolling through screens
As on a computer, you scroll on the Treo
smartphone to move from field to field or
page to page, or in some cases to highlight
an item or option in a list.
You can also scroll using the stylus. Tap an
onscreen scroll arrow, or drag the slider of
an onscreen scroll bar.
In list screens, use the 5-way
to
select and move between entries such as
notes, memos, contacts, or photos. In
individual entry screens—such as a single
photo or email message—use the 5-way to
move among the items on the screen or to
move to another entry.
The behavior of the 5-way for list screens
and entry screens varies according to
application. Here are some general
scrolling tips that apply in most
applications:
26
•
Press Right , Left , Up , or
Down to move to the next field,
button, or action in that direction.
•
In list screens, press and hold Up
or
Down to scroll one screen at a time.
•
When inside a text field, press Right
or Left to scroll to the next character
or word, press Up
or Down to
scroll between lines, or press and hold
MOVING AROUND THE SCREEN
to scroll one screen
Slider
Scroll arrows
Highlighting and selecting items
On most screens, one item—a button, a
list entry, or a check box—is highlighted by
default. The highlight identifies which item
is affected by your next action. Use the
5-way to move the highlight from one item
to another before opening or selecting it.
The highlight can take one of two forms,
depending on what is highlighted:
•
Border glow: When an onscreen
button (such as OK or Cancel) or pick list
is highlighted, the item displays a glow
around its border. If an entire list screen
2
CHAPTER
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
is highlighted, the glow appears at the
top and bottom of the screen only.
When a border appears at the top and
bottom of a list screen, press Center on the
5-way to highlight the first item in the list.
TIP
After you open an application (see
Opening applications), experiment with using
the 5-way to highlight various screen
elements.
TIP
Highlighting text
You can use the stylus to highlight text on
the screen.
•
Colored background: When a phone
number, text, an email address, a web
link, or an item in a list is highlighted,
the item is displayed as white text
against a colored background. Examples
of lists include the Contacts list, the
Messaging Inbox, and the Tasks list.
After highlighting an item, you can select or
activate it by pressing Center
, or by
tapping the item with the stylus.
•
Tap and drag the stylus across the text
you want to highlight.
•
To highlight a word, double-tap it.
•
To highlight a paragraph, triple-tap it.
Accessing command buttons
In most applications, command buttons
such as New, OK, and Details appear at the
bottom of the screen. In many cases, you
can jump directly to these buttons instead
of scrolling to them.
•
From a list screen, such as the Contacts
list or Memos list, press Right to
jump to the first button.
MOVING AROUND THE SCREEN
27
CHAPTER
2
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
•
From a screen where you create or edit
entries, such as Edit Contacts, press
Center
to jump to the first button.
•
From a dialog box, such as Edit
Categories, press Up
or Down
scroll to the buttons.
to
KEY TERM Dialog box
A set of options and
command buttons that are enclosed by a
border and that enable you to carry out a
specific task.
Selecting menu items
Many applications have menus to give you
access to additional features. These menus
are usually hidden from view, but they
appear when you press Menu
. To get
the most out of your Treo smartphone, it’s
a good idea to familiarize yourself with the
additional features available through the
various application menus.
1 Press Menu
to display an
application’s menus.
28
MOVING AROUND THE SCREEN
Menu shortcut
2 Press Right and Left
between menus.
to switch
3 Press Up
and Down
menu item.
to highlight a
4 Press Center
to select the menu
item, or press Menu
to close the
menu and cancel your selection.
Most menu items have menu shortcuts
listed in the menu. To use a menu shortcut,
press Menu plus the shortcut letter. You don’t
have to see the menu item to use the menu
shortcut. For example, when you’re in
Calendar, you can press Menu + N to create a
new event.
TIP
Selecting options in a pick list
•
A range of options is often presented in a
type of menu called a pick list, which can
be identified by a downward-pointing
arrow. Pick lists are different from the
application menus previously described.
The application menus give you access to
additional features, and pick lists let you
select the contents for a particular field.
Stylus: Use your stylus to tap the pick
list.
•
Tap the item you want from the list.
•
To exit the pick list without making a
selection, tap outside the list.
2
CHAPTER
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
You can select items from a pick list with
the 5-way or the stylus.
•
5-way: Use the 5-way
to highlight
the pick list, and then press Center
to display the items in the list.
•
Press Up
and Down
the item you want.
to highlight
•
Press Center
to select the
highlighted item.
•
To exit the pick list without making a
selection, press Left or Right .
MOVING AROUND THE SCREEN
29
CHAPTER
2
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
Using the keyboard
Backlight
Backspace
Option
Return
Shift/Find
Menu
Space
Alt
Entering lowercase and uppercase letters
When using the keyboard, most people
find it easiest to hold the Treo smartphone
with two hands and use the tips of both
thumbs to press the keys.
TIP
? The Treo smartphone includes
DID YOU KNOW
a keyboard backlight that turns on and off
when the screen turns on or off. The backlight
also dims when an active call lasts longer than
a specified period of time. See Optimizing
power settings to adjust the automatic
shut-off and dimming intervals.
30
USING THE KEYBOARD
•
To enter lowercase letters, press the
desired keys.
•
To enter an uppercase letter, press
Shift/Find
and then press a letter
key. You don’t need to press and hold
Shift while entering a letter. When Shift
is active, the
symbol appears in the
lower-right corner of the screen.
•
To turn Caps Lock on, press Shift/Find
twice. To turn it off, press Shift/
Find
once. When Caps Lock is on,
the
symbol appears in the lower-right
corner of the screen.
Entering numbers, punctuation, and
symbols
Number, punctuation, and symbol
characters appear above the letters on
the keys. To enter these characters, do one
of the following:
Symbol
Letter
•
•
Press Option
, and then press the
key with the desired character shown
above the letter. You don’t need to press
and hold Option while pressing the
second key. When Option is active, the
symbol appears in the lower-right
corner of the screen.
To turn Option Lock on, press Option
twice. To turn it off, press Option
once. When Option Lock is on, the
symbol
appears in the lower-right
corner of the screen.
DID YOU KNOW? Some application views
automatically default to Option Lock, such as
the Dial Pad View in the Phone application or
in the Calculator. In this case, you do not need
to press Option to enter numbers.
2
CHAPTER
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
Entering other symbols and accented
characters
Symbols and accented characters that do
not appear on the keyboard are sometimes
called alternate characters because they
are entered using the Alt
key.
1 Enter the character that corresponds to
the symbol or accented character you
want. See the table on the next page.
2 Press Alt
.
3 Press Up , Down , Right , or
Left to highlight the desired
character.
4 Press Center
character.
to insert the
DID YOU KNOW? Alternate characters are
grouped by their similarity to the base key. For
example, the alternate characters for the e key
are é, è, ë, ê, and .
USING THE KEYBOARD
31
CHAPTER
2
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
0
Symbols and accented characters
Press…
Then press
Alt
to
select…
Press…
Then press
Alt
to
select…
Press…
Then press
Alt
to
select…
a
áàäâãåæ
n
ñ
u
úùüû
A
ÁÀÄÂÃÅÆ
N
Ñ
U
ÚÙÜÛ
b or B
ß
o
óòöôœõ
x or X
x¤
c
碩
O
ÓÒÖÔŒÕ
y
ýÿ
C
Ç¢©
p or P
¶
Y
ÝŸ
e
éèëê
r or R
®
!
¡
E
ÉÈËÊ
s
ßš
?
¿
i
íìïî
S
ߊ
:
:-) :-( ;-)
I
ÍÌÏÎ
t or T
™
$
l or L
£
Press Alt
characters:
by itself, after a space or at the beginning or end of a line, to select these
;_•\%=°÷
32
£¥¢
USING THE KEYBOARD
£¥¢[]{}<>«»©®™~^ø|
Opening applications
Each quick button opens two applications:
•
When you open an application using either
Applications View or an application button,
you automatically close the application you
were previously using.
To open a button’s primary application,
simply press the button.
Button
Primary application
Phone
Using the quick buttons
Calendar
The front of the Treo 755P smartphone has
three buttons that you can use to open
applications. The fourth button opens
Applications View (see Using Applications
View).
Email
You can customize the quick buttons
yourself; see Reassigning buttons for details.
2
CHAPTER
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
•
To access a button’s secondary
application, press Option
and then
press the quick button.
TIP
Phone
Option
Calendar
Applications
Email
Buttons
Secondary application
+
Web
+
World Clock
+
Messaging
DID YOU KNOW? Pressing Option + Menu dims
your smartphone screen.
OPENING APPLICATIONS
33
CHAPTER
2
MOVING AROUND ON YOUR SMARTPHONE
Using Applications View
You can access all available applications
through Applications View.
1 Press Applications
In Applications View, you can also do any of
the following:
•
Press Applications
repeatedly to
cycle through various categories of
applications. See Applications settings
for more info on categories.
•
Enter the first few letters of the
application’s name to highlight it. For
example, if you enter P, it highlights
Phone; if you then enter R, it highlights
Prefs. If you pause and then enter R, it
highlights the first application that starts
with R.
.
2 Use the 5-way
to highlight the
application you want to use.
You can also press and hold Applications
from any screen on your smartphone to select
from a list of your most recently used apps.
TIP
3 Press Center
application.
34
OPENING APPLICATIONS
to open the selected
C H A PT ER
3
Your phone
The Phone application is your home base for making and
receiving calls and for storing info about the people you need to
stay in touch with.
You can effectively manage multiple calls, such as sending text
messages to ignored calls, swapping between calls, and
creating three-way conference calls. Your Palm® Treo™ 755P
smartphone helps you perform all these tasks with ease.
You can do more than manage your phone calls, too. You can
send text messages, open applications, go to your favorite web
pages, see your upcoming appointments, and even find out if
you have new email messages.
Benefits
•
Stay in touch: you choose how
•
Save time with shortcuts to your
favorite info
•
Have fun: add wallpaper and
ringtones
In this chapter
Turning your smartphone on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Making calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Receiving calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Using voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
What can I do when I’m on a call? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Defining favorite buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Using a phone headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Customizing phone settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
What are all those icons? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Turning your
smartphone on and
off
example, when you’re on an airplane and
want to look at your calendar.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
1 Press and release Power/End
to wake up the screen.
You can also press any of the quick buttons
or the Applications button to wake up your
smartphone screen.
TIP
NOTE Throughout this guide we use the
term smartphone to describe your device
and its physical attributes. We use the term
phone to describe the features of your
smartphone that let you connect to your
wireless service provider’s network to
make and receive calls and transmit data.
The phone and the screen of your
smartphone can be turned on and off
separately. This means that you can wake
up the screen to use just the organizer
features of your smartphone, without
turning on the phone. Also, when the
screen is turned off, the phone can be on
and ready for you to receive and make
calls.
Power/End
Center
2 Press Center
to turn off Keyguard.
For more info about turning Keyguard on
and off, see Locking your keyboard
(Keyguard).
3 Press and release Power/End
to turn off the screen.
Waking up the screen
Wake up the screen and leave the phone
turned off when you want to use only the
organizer features of your smartphone; for
You can set how long the screen stays on.
Press Applications, select Preferences,
select Power, and then adjust the Auto-off
after setting.
TIP
TURNING YOUR SMARTPHONE ON AND OFF
37
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
Turning your phone on and off
When your phone is on, it is connected to
your wireless service provider’s network
(provided you are in a coverage area) so
that you can make and receive phone calls
and use wireless services such as email,
messaging, and the web browser. During
initial setup, your phone is on by default, so
you can use wireless services right away.
If you turn off your phone, you can still use
the organizer features such as Contacts
and Calendar, as well as the media
features, such as the pTunes music
application and Pics&Videos. This is
sometimes referred to as flight mode and
is ideal for airplane flights and maximizing
battery life.
1 Wake up the screen.
2 Press and hold Power/End
turn on your phone.
to
If the Ringer switch is set to Sound On,
you hear a series of tones when you turn your
phone on and off (see Silencing sounds).
TIP
38
TURNING YOUR SMARTPHONE ON AND OFF
When your smartphone locates a signal
(provided you are in a coverage area),
your wireless service provider’s name
and the signal-strength
icon
appear at the top of the screen,
indicating that you can use the phone
and Internet features (if supported by
the mobile network).
If you’re outside a coverage area, No
Service appears in the upper-left corner.
TIP
3 Press and hold Power/End
again to turn off your phone. When your
phone is off, Phone Off appears at the
top of the Phone application screen and
your smartphone is not connected to
any mobile network. You can still use
the nonwireless features of your
smartphone, such as Contacts,
Calendar, Tasks, and Memos.
Opening the Phone application
•
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
Press Phone
to open the Phone
application’s Main View.
Status icons
Dial Pad
Favorite
buttons
3 Tap Dial or press Send
the call.
to make
If you changed the wallpaper in the Phone
application’s Main View (see Customizing the
Phone application’s Main View), you can still
access the Dial Pad. From the Phone
application’s Main View, press Send, and then
select Dial Pad.
TIP
Making calls
Your smartphone offers several options for
making calls. As you become familiar with
your smartphone, you’ll discover which
method you prefer.
DID YOU KNOW? You can paste numbers directly
into the Dial Pad. Copy a number from another
application and press Phone to switch to the
Dial Pad. Open the Edit menu and select
Paste. Press Send to dial.
Dialing using the onscreen Dial Pad
1 Press Phone
.
2 Enter the phone number by tapping the
onscreen Dial Pad with the stylus.
Dialing using the keyboard
1 Press Phone
.
2 Press the numbered keys to enter the
phone number. (You don’t need to press
Option.)
MAKING CALLS
39
YOUR PHONE
CHAPTER
3
3 Using the keyboard, just start entering
one of the following for the contact you
want to call:
3 Press Send
to make the call.
You can also press Center on the 5-way to
make the call.
TIP
•
First name (JOH for John)
•
Last name (SMI for Smith)
•
First initial and last name (JSM for
John Smith)
For example, entering SM would display
Smilla Anderson, John Smith, and Sally
Martin. Entering JSM finds only John
Smith.
Text appears
here as you
enter it
Dialing by contact name
Before you can dial a call by contact name,
you must create some contacts (see
Adding a contact), or import them by
synchronizing (see Synchronizing
information—the basics).
1 Press Phone
.
2 Select the Contacts favorite button.
To restart your search, press Backspace to
delete letters you’ve entered. Or select
Cancel to return to Main View.
TIP
4 Select the number you want to dial.
5 Press Send
40
MAKING CALLS
to dial.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
? If you want to be able to dial by
entering a contact name in the Phone
application’s Main View (instead of a phone
number), you can change a setting to do that
(see Customizing phone settings).
DID YOU KNOW
To see more info for a contact, highlight
the name and press Center on the 5-way to
view the address, company, and other details.
TIP
Dialing with a speed-dial favorite button
Your smartphone comes with a few
predefined speed-dial favorite buttons, but
you can also create your own favorites. See
Creating a speed-dial favorite button.
1 Press Phone
2 Press Down
.
to access Favorites.
3 Use the 5-way
to highlight the
speed-dial favorite you want.
Look for the
icon to distinguish a
speed-dial favorite from other types of
favorites.
To view more favorite buttons, repeatedly
press Down or Right on the 5-way to scroll to
other Favorites pages.
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? If you select a contact from
your Contacts list when you create a
speed-dial favorite, you can see all the
numbers for that contact. Highlight that
contact’s speed-dial favorite button, and
press Space on the keyboard.
4 Press Center
to make the call.
Dialing from a web page or message
Your smartphone recognizes most phone
numbers that appear on web pages or in
text or email messages.
1 Select the phone number on the web
page or in the message.
MAKING CALLS
41
YOUR PHONE
CHAPTER
3
To select from your most recently dialed
numbers: From the Phone application’s
Main View, press Send
to open the
Redial list, select the number you want to
call, and then press Send
again to
dial.
2 Press Center
to open the Dial
Number dialog box.
3 Select Dial to dial the number.
If you can’t use the 5-way or stylus to
highlight and dial a phone number on a web
page or in a message, it means that your
smartphone doesn’t recognize the number as
a phone number.
TIP
Redialing a recently called number
To dial the last number: From the Phone
application’s Main View, press and hold
Send
to dial the last number you
called.
42
MAKING CALLS
To select from a chronological list of
calls: Select the Call Log favorite button.
You can also access your Call Log from the
Phone application’s Main View by pressing
Send
and selecting Call Log from
the Redial list.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
Receiving calls
To receive calls, your phone must be on.
This is different from having only the
screen turned on (see Turning your phone
on and off). When your phone is off, your
calls go to voicemail.
DID YOU KNOW? If music is playing and a call
arrives, the phone rings softly. The music
pauses automatically if you answer the call
and resumes when you hang up.
Ending a call
Do one of the following:
•
Press Power/End
•
Select Hang Up All.
.
•
Press the button on the headset (if the
headset is attached).
DID YOU KNOW? If an entry in your Call Log
supports text messaging, you can send a text
message to that number. Highlight the entry
in your Call Log, open the Record menu, and
then select Message to address a message to
the selected number.
See a photo of the person calling you!
Learn how to assign a caller ID photo in
Assigning a caller ID photo.
TIP
RECEIVING CALLS
43
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
To answer a call, do one of the following:
•
Press Send
•
Select Answer.
.
•
Press the headset button (if the
headset is attached).
The headset button may work differently
on headsets other than the one provided with
your smartphone.
•
Slide the Ringer switch to Sound
Off
. This immediately silences all
system sounds, including the ringer.
DID YOU KNOW? When you silence the ringer
while it is ringing, you can either answer the
call or let it ring through to voicemail.
TIP
To ignore a call, do one of the following:
Send the call to voicemail: Press Power/
End
or select Ignore.
Send the caller a text message: Select
Ignore with Text. This option sends the
call to voicemail and opens a text message
addressed to the caller.
Using voicemail
Your wireless service provider’s service
includes voicemail. Keep in mind that
airtime and other charges apply when
using voicemail from your smartphone.
Setting up voicemail
If you can’t connect to your wireless
service provider’s voicemail system, contact
your wireless service provider for assistance.
TIP
NOTE Sending text messages to land line
phones may not be supported.
To silence the phone while it is ringing, do
one of the following:
•
44
Press any key on your smartphone
except Send, Power/End, or the 5-way.
USING VOICEMAIL
1 Make sure your phone is turned on (see
Turning your phone on and off) and that
you are in a coverage area.
2 Press Phone
.
3 Press and hold 1 or select the
Voicemail favorite button to dial your
wireless service provider’s automated
voicemail system.
4 Follow the voice prompts to set up your
voicemail.
Voicemail notification
When you have a new voicemail message,
you are notified with an Alert dialog box.
•
To dismiss the Alert dialog box, select
OK.
•
To play the message, select Listen.
When you have messages that you have
not listened to, a Voicemail
icon also
appears in the title bar of the Phone
application. You can select this icon to
listen to your voicemail.
Listening to voicemail messages
1 Press Phone
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
.
2 Press and hold 1 to dial the voicemail
system, or select the Voicemail favorite
button.
3 Enter your voicemail password using
the keyboard.
Remember, you do not need to press
Option to enter numbers, *, or # while on a
call.
TIP
NOTE If you defined Extra Digits for the
Voicemail favorite button (see Editing a
favorite button for details), you can select
this button to enter your password.
If the voicemail icon stays in the title bar
after you listen to your messages, you can
clear the voicemail icon. Open the Options
menu, select Phone Preferences, and then
select Clear Voicemail Icon.
TIP
USING VOICEMAIL
45
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
What can I do when
I’m on a call?
When you make or receive a call, Active
Call View appears.
Call
duration
Caller’s
name and
number
If the screen dims during a call, press any
key except Power/End to restore the screen
brightness. Be careful not to press Power/End
to restore the screen brightness because this
ends the call.
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? You can set how long the
screen stays at full brightness during phone
calls. See Optimizing power settings for
details.
46
WHAT CAN I DO WHEN I’M ON A CALL?
Use the 5-way
or stylus to select the
onscreen buttons. Here’s what the buttons
do:
Ends the call immediately. You can
also press the headset button (if the
headset is attached).
Turns on the speakerphone. When
the speakerphone is on, you can
take the smartphone away from
your ear and use other features
during a call. For example, you can
check your calendar or look up
contact info.
Turns off the speakerphone when it
is on.
Replaces the Spkr-phone button
when a Bluetooth® headset is
attached. Select this button to
transfer the call from the Bluetooth
headset to the built-in earpiece.
Places the current call on hold.
Enables you to place another call
while the first call is on hold. For
information on handling a second
incoming call, see Answering a
second call (call waiting).
Opens the Dial Pad so you can
manually dial additional numbers,
such as an extension or a response
to a voice prompt.
Dials any extra digits (such as a
password or an extension) that you
assigned to a favorite button. This
button replaces the Dial Pad button
during outgoing calls to numbers
that include predefined extra digits.
See Defining favorite buttons for
information on defining extra digits.
Mutes the microphone so that you
cannot be heard.
Switching applications during a call
You can use many other applications on
your smartphone while holding a phone
conversation, including the organizer and
text messaging features. You cannot,
however, make a data connection while on
a call. This means that you cannot browse
the web or send and receive email
messages while on a call.
1 Do one of the following:
•
Select Hold to pause your
conversation while you view the other
application.
•
Select Spkr-phone to continue the
conversation while you view the other
application.
•
Connect a headset (see Using a
phone headset).
2 Press Applications
DID YOU KNOW? Do you accidentally press
onscreen buttons when you’re on a call? You
can disable the screen’s touch-sensitive
feature during your calls; see Locking your
screen.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
.
3 Select the icon for the application you
want to open.
4 Press Phone
Active Call View.
anytime to return to
WHAT CAN I DO WHEN I’M ON A CALL?
47
YOUR PHONE
CHAPTER
3
You can also press Phone to toggle
between Active Call View and Main View in
the Phone app, so you can open a favorite by
selecting its button.
the number into the first available phone
number field for that contact.
TIP
Saving phone numbers
After you complete an outgoing call to a
number that is not in your Contacts list,
you are prompted to add the number to
your Contacts list. You are also prompted
to add new numbers from incoming calls
with caller ID.
•
To decline adding this number, select
Cancel.
•
To disable the Add New Number
prompt, check the Don’t ask me this
again box.
You can turn the Add New Number
prompt on and off. From the Phone
application’s Main View, open the Options
menu, and select Phone Preferences. To turn
this option on, check the Ask to add
unknown phone numbers after calls box.
To turn this option off, uncheck this box.
TIP
If you don’t add a number right away, follow
these steps to add it later.
1 In the Call Log (see Redialing a recently
called number), highlight the number
you want to save.
•
•
48
To create a new contact entry for this
number, select Create a New Contact,
and enter the contact’s info.
To add this number to an existing
contact entry, select Add to a Contact,
and then select the contact. This pastes
WHAT CAN I DO WHEN I’M ON A CALL?
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Add Contact.
4 Enter the information for the entry.
5 Select Done.
Making a second call
DID YOU KNOW? When the second call is an
outgoing call, you can conference the two
calls, but you cannot swap between them.
You can make a second call while your first
call is still active.
1 Dial the first number and wait until the
person answers.
When the second call is an incoming call, you
can swap between the two calls, but you
cannot conference them.
2 Select Hold.
When two calls are active and you press
Power/End, you hang up both calls. If the
second call is an outgoing call, you can return
to the first call by waiting for the person on
the second call to hang up. If you accidentally
hang up both calls, your smartphone
automatically dials the number that was on
hold.
3 Select Add Call.
4 Dial the second number using any of
the methods described in Making calls.
5 When the Dial another call prompt
appears, select Yes.
When two calls are in progress, Active Call
View includes two status lines, each
representing one of the calls.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
Answering a second call (call waiting)
When you are on a call, you can receive a
second call. When the second call comes
in, you hear a call waiting tone and the Call
Waiting dialog box appears. You can do any
of the following to handle the second call:
•
To place the current call on hold and
answer the new call, press Send
or select Answer.
•
To send the new call to voicemail, select
Ignore.
WHAT CAN I DO WHEN I’M ON A CALL?
49
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
•
To send the new call to voicemail and
send the caller a text message, select
Ignore with Text.
•
To hang up the current call and answer
the new call, press Power/End
.
When the incoming call message
reappears, select Answer or press
Send
.
After you answer a second call, you can
switch between the original call and the
second call by selecting Swap.
Making a conference call
When you are on a call and place a second
outgoing call, you can join the two calls in a
conference session, provided that the
service is available in your area. Please
contact your wireless service provider for
more information. Additional charges may
apply and minutes in your mobile account
may be deducted for each call you place.
1 While the first call is in progress, place a
second call.
2 Select Conf. This joins the two calls in a
conference session.
50
WHAT CAN I DO WHEN I’M ON A CALL?
3 To end the conference, press Power/
End
to end all the calls.
? Pressing Send during a
conference call usually hangs up the second
call. However, depending on your network
connection, you may occasionally hang up the
first call.
DID YOU KNOW
Using Flash mode during a call
Flash mode enables you to manually
manage your calls while one or more calls
are active. This mode is often used during a
conference call when one of the calls has
ended but the other remains connected.
1 Press Send
View.
•
If you have one call in progress, to
make an outgoing second call, dial the
number using any of the methods
described in Making calls.
•
If you have one call in progress and
place an outgoing second call, press
Send
after establishing a
connection with the second party to
set up a conference session using
three-way calling.
•
If you have two calls in conference,
press Send
to hang up one of
the calls; you can then dial another
number and place the new caller into
the conference session.
from Active Call
2 If the Do you want to switch to Flash
mode prompt appears, select Yes.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
4 To exit Flash mode and end all the calls,
press Power/End
.
Forwarding calls
3 While in Flash mode, do any of the
following:
•
If you have one call in progress and
answer an incoming second call,
press Send
to swap between
the calls.
Please check with your wireless service
provider about availability and pricing of
forwarding calls to another phone; call
forwarding is not available in all areas, and
additional charges may apply.
WHAT CAN I DO WHEN I’M ON A CALL?
51
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Ask your wireless
service provider for call forwarding codes.
You need the codes to enable and disable
call forwarding. You may also need to
modify the following steps based on your
wireless service provider’s instructions.
1 Press Phone
.
Your Treo smartphone provides 70 favorite
buttons for quick access to the following
common tasks:
2 Enter your wireless service provider’s
call forwarding code followed by the
number where you want to forward
your calls.
•
Dialing a phone number (speed dial)
•
Accessing your Call Log
•
Accessing the onscreen Dial Pad
3 Press Send
View.
•
Opening an application
•
Accessing a web page
•
Addressing a text or email message
•
Accessing voicemail (preset on your
Treo smartphone)
from Active Call
4 Call your smartphone to confirm that
call forwarding is active.
When you’re ready to turn off call
forwarding, open the Phone application
and enter the code to disable your wireless
service provider’s call forwarding feature.
52
Defining favorite
buttons
DEFINING FAVORITE BUTTONS
Your wireless service provider may preset
favorite buttons on your smartphone that
are customized for their services, and you
may not be able to edit or delete these
preset favorite buttons. However, you can
always customize the remaining favorite
buttons to perform any of the supported
tasks.
? If you’re upgrading from a
If there are no blank buttons on the current
Favorites page, press Right on the 5-way to
scroll through the other pages. If all your
favorites are full, you can delete a favorite to
make room for a new one (see Deleting a
favorite button).
TIP
3 Enter a label for the favorite:
•
If the entry is for an existing contact,
select Lookup. Start entering the last
name of the contact, and select the
contact when it appears in the lookup
list.
•
If the entry is for a new contact, enter
the label, press Down , and enter
the number.
DID YOU KNOW
previous Treo smartphone, your favorites may
be transferred along with your other info.
However, you may need to rearrange the
order in which your favorites appear by
opening the Record menu and then selecting
Edit Favorites Pages.
DID YOU KNOW? You can assign a special
ringtone for a contact. See Assigning a caller
ID ringtone for details.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
Creating a speed-dial favorite button
1 Press Phone
.
2 Use the 5-way to select a blank favorite
button.
4 (Optional) Enter a Quick Key, which you
can press and hold from the Phone
application to instantly dial this
DEFINING FAVORITE BUTTONS
53
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
speed-dial number. (The Quick Key
works only from the Main view of the
phone application.)
5 (Optional) Select More, and then select
advanced options:
Extra Digits: Defines additional digits
to dial, such as a password or
extension. To enter a one-second
pause, insert a comma between digits.
To add a longer pause, enter more
commas.
Dial Extra Digits Automatically: Dials
predefined extra digits immediately
after dialing the phone number, when
checked.
5 Enter a label for the favorite and enter
any other necessary information on the
screen.
6 (Optional) Enter a Quick Key, which
you can press and hold to open the
favorite from the Phone application.
(The Quick Key works only from the
Main view of the phone application.)
7 Select OK.
DID YOU KNOW? When creating a Message or
Email favorite, you can enter multiple
addresses; simply separate each address with
a comma. This is an easy way to send
messages to a group of people.
6 Select OK.
Editing a favorite button
Creating other types of favorite buttons
2 Use the 5-way
Favorites.
1 Press Phone
1 Press Phone
2 Use the 5-way
Favorites.
54
.
to access
.
to access
3 Highlight the favorite button you want to
edit.
3 Select a blank button.
4 Press Menu
4 Select the Types pick list and select Call
Log, Dial Pad, Application, Message,
Email, or Web Link.
5 Select Edit Favorites Button on the
Record menu.
DEFINING FAVORITE BUTTONS
.
6 Make the desired changes. For
example, you can add a Quick Key,
which you can press and hold to
instantly open the favorite from the
Phone application. (The Quick Key
works only from the Main view of the
phone application.)
7 Select OK.
You can also organize your buttons on
various Favorites pages. Open the Record
menu and select Edit Favorites Pages. Drag
and drop the buttons into a new slot. To move
a favorite to another page, drag the button
onto the page icon at the bottom of the
screen.
TIP
Deleting a favorite button
1 Press Phone
to access
3 Highlight the favorite button you want to
delete.
In addition to the stereo headset included
with your smartphone, your smartphone is
compatible with the following types of
headsets that are sold separately:
•
Wired headsets with a 2.5mm
connector (3-pin or 4-pin)
•
Wireless headsets and car kits enabled
with Bluetooth 1.1 or 1.2 wireless
technology
.
5 Select Edit Favorites Button on the
Record menu.
6 Select Delete.
You can connect a phone headset for
hands-free operation. If you need to use
your phone while driving and this is
permitted in your area, we recommend
using a phone headset (wired stereo
headset included) or a hands-free car kit
(sold separately).
.
2 Use the 5-way
Favorites.
4 Press Menu
Using a phone
headset
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
The headset designed for Treo 180/270/
300 devices is not compatible with your Treo
755P smartphone.
TIP
7 Select OK.
USING A PHONE HEADSET
55
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
Check the specifications for your headset
or car kit to confirm compatibility. When in
doubt, ask the manufacturer if the product
is compatible with Treo 755P smartphones.
To find compatible hands-free devices, go
to http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.
NOTE You cannot use a headset with
Bluetooth wireless technology to listen to
music files.
If you want to use a stereo headset with a
3.5mm connector to listen to music files, you
need to purchase a 2.5mm stereo adapter.
Visit http://go.palm.com/treo755p/ for more
info on audio accessories.
When using the headset that is included
with your smartphone, you can press the
headset button to perform any of the
following tasks:
•
Answer an incoming call
•
Answer a call-waiting call
•
Pick up a call that is on hold
•
Switch between two calls (if the second
call is incoming)
•
Join two calls in a conference (if the
second call is outgoing)
•
Hang up all calls in progress
TIP
The headset button may work differently
on other headsets.
TIP
Using a wired headset
Microphone
Speakers
56
USING A PHONE HEADSET
Headset
button
Connecting to a Bluetooth hands-free
device
KEY TERM Partnership Two devices—for
example, your smartphone and a hands-free
device—that can connect because each
device finds the same passkey on the other
device. Once you form a partnership with a
device, you don’t need to enter a passkey to
connect with that device again. Partnership is
also known as paired relationship, pairing,
trusted device, and trusted pair.
Once you set up a partnership with a
Bluetooth headset or car kit, you can
communicate with that device whenever it
is turned on and within range. Bluetooth
range is up to 30 feet/10 meters in
optimum environmental conditions.
Performance and range may be reduced by
physical obstacles, radio interference from
nearby electronic equipment, and other
factors.
If you hear a headset buzz or experience
poor microphone performance, your headset
may be incompatible with your smartphone.
TIP
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Prepare your
headset or car kit to accept a connection
from another Bluetooth device. See the
documentation that came with your
hands-free device for instructions.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
3 (Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your smartphone when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to re-create any
partnerships you have already created.
4 Keep Visibility set to Hidden, and then
select Setup Devices.
5 Select Hands-free Setup.
1 Press Applications
and select
Bluetooth
or tap the Bluetooth
icon in the title bar.
2 Select Bluetooth On.
USING A PHONE HEADSET
57
YOUR PHONE
CHAPTER
3
7 After you finish setting up the device,
select Done to return to Trusted
Devices View.
NOTE For some car kits, you need to
6 Follow the onscreen instructions to
create a partnership with the specific
hands-free device. When prompted,
enter a passkey.
IMPORTANT Some hands-free devices
have a predefined passkey; if your device
has a predefined passkey, you can find it in
the documentation for that device. Other
devices provide a screen where you enter
a passkey that you make up. In either case,
you must use the same passkey on both
your smartphone and your hands-free
device. We recommend that where
possible, you make up a passkey of 16
alphanumeric characters (letters and
numerals only) to improve the security of
your smartphone. The longer the passkey,
the more difficult it is for the passkey to be
deciphered.
58
USING A PHONE HEADSET
initiate a Bluetooth connection from your
smartphone to complete the partnership
process. To do this, highlight the car kit in
Trusted Devices View, press Menu
,
and then select Connect.
8 (Optional) Enable advanced hands-free
features by pressing the Multifunction
button (MFB) on the hands-free device.
You can tell that the connection is
successful when you see a light-blue
headset icon in the title bar of the Phone
application. You can now use your
smartphone with the Bluetooth hands-free
device.
Using a Bluetooth hands-free device
After you create a partnership with your
Bluetooth hands-free device and you turn it
on within range (up to 30 feet/10 meters),
your smartphone automatically routes all
calls to the hands-free device instead of to
the earpiece on your smartphone. When a
call comes in, your smartphone rings and
the hands-free device beeps. Even if you
answer the call on your smartphone, the
call goes to the hands-free device. If you
prefer to route calls to the earpiece on your
smartphone, you can change the settings
on your smartphone to do this; see
Customizing advanced settings for your
hands-free device.
If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free
device and you want to return to the earpiece
during a call, select Cancel Bluetooth in
Active Call View. To return the call to the
hands-free device, open the Options menu
and select Connect Bluetooth.
TIP
The features of your hands-free device vary
by model. Check the documentation for
your hands-free device for details about
these features. Your smartphone can
support the following actions, provided that
your hands-free device also supports them:
•
Transfer an outgoing call from the
earpiece on your smartphone to the
hands-free device
•
Ignore an incoming call
•
Redial the last number you called from
the hands-free device
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
DID YOU KNOW? If you have more than one
Bluetooth hands-free device, the last one you
connected to becomes the active device. To
switch between devices, disconnect the
active device before you try to connect to the
other device.
Customizing advanced settings for your
hands-free device
You can set whether your hands-free
device automatically answer calls, provided
the device supports this feature.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
•
Answer an incoming call
2 Select Hands-free.
•
Hang up a call and answer a call-waiting
call
3 Do one of the following:
•
Place a call on hold and answer a
call-waiting call
•
Hang up a single call
To send all calls to your hands-free
device: Check the Always route calls to
handsfree box. Select the Auto answer
pick list and select whether you want
USING A PHONE HEADSET
59
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
your hands-free device to automatically
answer incoming calls and how quickly
it answers.
To choose between the earpiece on
your smartphone and your
hands-free device on a call-by-call
basis: Uncheck the Always route calls
to handsfree box. When the phone
rings, you can answer the call with your
hands-free device by pressing the
multifunction button on your hands-free
device, or you can answer the call with
the earpiece on your smartphone by
using the controls on your smartphone
(see Receiving calls).
4 Select Done.
Customizing phone
settings
Customizing the Phone application’s
Main View
Phone Display Options let you customize
the appearance and entry mode of the
Phone application’s Main View.
60
CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS
1 Press Phone
2 Press Menu
.
.
3 Select Options, and then select Phone
Display Options.
4 Set any of the following options:
Show…: Sets whether the Dial Pad or
wallpaper appears in the Phone
application’s Main View. If you select
Show Wallpaper, select the thumbnail
image and then select an image to use
as wallpaper.
If you select the Show Wallpaper option,
you can still access the Dial Pad. From the
Phone application’s Main View, press Send to
open the Redial list, and then select Dial Pad.
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? You can also set the
background for the Calendar Agenda View.
See Customizing display options for your
calendar for details.
Show Favorite buttons: Sets whether
Favorites appear in the Phone
application’s Main View.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
Rows: Sets the number of favorite
button rows that appear in the Phone
application’s Main View.
5 Select OK.
Typing: Sets whether typing enters
numbers in the Dial Pad or starts a
contact search.
If you select the Typing starts contacts
search option, you can still enter numbers in
the Dial Pad by pressing Option before
entering the first number.
TIP
Show Calendar event: Sets whether
the current event from the Calendar
application appears in the Phone
application’s Main View. When this
option is enabled, you can then select
this event to jump to the Calendar
application.
Selecting ringtones
You can set various tones for various types
of incoming calls.
DID YOU KNOW? You can download any
compatible ringtone directly to your
smartphone (see Downloading files from a
web page). You can also download ringtones
to your computer and then email them to your
smartphone.
1 Press Phone
2 Press Menu
.
.
3 Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS
61
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
4 Select the Application pick list and
select Ring Tones.
ID who is not in your Contacts or
Favorites.
Roaming: A special tone for incoming
calls when you’re outside your home
mobile network.
9 Select Done.
5 Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
6 Select the Vibrate pick list and select
how you want your smartphone to
vibrate upon an incoming call.
7 (Optional) Uncheck the Escalate ring
tone volume box if you want the ring to
remain at the same volume regardless
of how long it rings.
8 Select ringtones from the following pick
lists:
Known Caller: An incoming call from
someone in your Contacts or Favorites.
Unknown Caller: An incoming call
from someone identified by caller
62
CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS
DID YOU KNOW? You can assign a ringtone to a
contact or to an entire category of contacts.
Ringtones assigned to individual contacts
override the ringtone assigned to a category
of contacts.
Creating and managing ringtones
You can also record sounds and use them
as ringtones.
1 Press Phone
2 Press Menu
.
.
3 Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
4 Select Manage.
5 Do one of the following:
•
To record a sound, select New.
•
To play a sound, select it with the
5-way
.
•
To delete a sound, highlight it and
press Backspace
.
•
To send a sound, highlight it and
select Send.
4 Select the Application pick list and
select Phone Alerts.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
6 Select Done twice.
You can also create a new sound by
selecting New in Sound & Alerts Preferences.
TIP
Selecting Phone alert tones
You can set various tones for various types
of alerts.
1 Press Phone
2 Press Menu
.
.
3 Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
5 Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
6 Select the Vibrate pick list and select
how you want your smartphone to
vibrate upon an incoming call.
7 Select alert tones from the following
pick lists:
Voicemail Alert: Indicates that a new
voicemail message has arrived.
Coverage in/out: Indicates that you
moved into or out of a coverage area.
Signal faded: Indicates that the signal
lost strength and a call was dropped.
8 Select Done.
CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS
63
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
Adjusting call volume
Assigning a caller ID ringtone
While a call is in progress, press the
Volume button on the side of your
smartphone to adjust the call volume.
Caller ID ringtones can let you know who is
calling before you even look at your
smartphone. This is a great way to identify
calls from important people in your life and
to screen calls you’d prefer not to answer.
1 Press Phone
.
2 Select the Contacts favorite button.
Volume button
Side button
3 Open the contact to whom you want to
give a caller ID ringtone.
4 Select Edit.
5 Select the Ringtone pick list and select
a tone for this contact entry.
Adjusting ringer volume
When a call is not in progress and music is
not playing, press the Volume button on
the side of your Treo smartphone to adjust
ringer volume, and then press the Side
button to confirm your selection.
6 Select OK.
64
CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS
You can assign a ringtone to an entire
category of contacts. For example, use a
special ringtone for categories such as Family,
Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category
pick list in the upper-right corner and select
Edit Categories. Select the category, and
then select the ringtone on the Edit Category
screen.
TIP
Assigning a caller ID photo
1 Press Phone
.
2 Select the Contacts favorite button.
3 Open the contact to whom you want to
give a caller ID photo.
4 Select Edit.
5 Select the Picture box and do one of
the following:
•
Select Camera to take a photo and
add it to this contact entry when you
save the photo.
•
Select Photos and select an existing
photo that you want to assign to this
contact.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
6 Select Done.
DID YOU KNOW? If you assign pictures to your
contacts in Microsoft Outlook (sold
separately) or Palm® Desktop software and
you install the desktop software from the
Palm Software Installation CD, the pictures
are automatically added to your contact
entries on your smartphone when you sync. If
you use third-party synchronization software,
picture sync may not be supported. Check
with the software vendor for information.
Setting your dialing preferences
Dialing preferences let you assign a prefix
to your phone numbers. For example, you
can automatically dial a 1 before all 10-digit
phone numbers. You can add a different
prefix based on the length of the phone
number.
CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS
65
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
1 Press Phone
2 Press Menu
.
.
3 Select Options and then select Dial
Preferences.
4 Set any of the following options:
Dialing from North America: Formats
phone numbers using North American
conventions (XXX-XXX-XXXX).
Always dial 1 in front of the area
code: Adds a 1 in front of 10-digit phone
numbers. This option is available only
when North American Dialing is
enabled.
International Prefix: Replaces the +
sign in front of International phone
numbers with the specified number.
To 7 digit numbers: Adds a prefix to
7-digit numbers. For example, enter
your own area code to automatically add
your area code when you dial local
numbers.
To (6), (5), (4), digit numbers: Adds a
prefix to numbers with the specified
number of digits. For example, if all the
phone numbers in your office begin
with 555, followed by a 4-digit
66
CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS
extension, you can select 4, enter your
area code, and then enter 555 as the
prefix. When you want to call a
colleague, simply enter the colleague’s
4-digit extension. Your smartphone
automatically dials the area code and
555 plus the 4-digit extension. You can
also create contact entries with just the
extension number and then dial the
number from your Contacts list.
5 Select OK.
Choosing your privacy settings
To maintain privacy, you can choose
whether your longitude and latitude
position are available to the network and
third-party applications at all times or only
during an emergency call.
1 Press Phone
2 Press Menu
.
.
3 Select Options, and then select Phone
Preferences.
telephone if you are deaf, are hard of
hearing, or have speech or language
disabilities.
4 Select one of the following:
Location ON: Enables the network to
determine your longitude and latitude
position at any time in order to provide
location-specific services.
Emergency Only: Restricts your
location information to emergency
services only.
5 Select OK.
Your device is compatible with select TTY
devices. You can connect a TTY/TDD
machine to your device through the
headset jack while this mode is enabled.
Please check with the manufacturer of your
TTY device for connectivity information and
to ensure that the TTY device supports
digital wireless transmission.
1 Press Phone
2 Press Menu
.
.
3 Select Options and then select Phone
Preferences.
4 Select the TTY/TDD pick list and select
one of the following settings:
Default Mode: Sends and receives text.
When Location ON is selected, the
Location
icon appears. When
Emergency Only is selected, a red slash
appears over the Location
icon.
VCO Mode: Sends voice and receives
text. This is also known as Voice Carry
Over Mode.
Enabling TTY
HCO Mode: Sends text and receives
voice. This is also known as Hearing
Carry Over Mode.
TTY (also known as a TDD or Text
Telephone) is a telecommunications device
that enables you to communicate by
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
Off: Sends and receives voice.
CUSTOMIZING PHONE SETTINGS
67
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
5 Select OK. A red TTY icon appears in
the title bar of the Phone application
whenever TTY is enabled.
Turning on the HAC Setting
3 Select Options and then select Phone
Preferences.
4 Check the Hearing Aid Compatibility
box.
5 Select OK.
CAUTION Do not turn on the Hearing Aid
Compatibility setting unless you use a
hearing aid with a telecoil. Using this
setting without a hearing aid or with a
hearing aid without a telecoil may be
harmful to your hearing.
When the Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC)
setting is on, your smartphone sends the
audio from your phone calls to the telecoil
rather than to the microphone of your
hearing aid. You are likely to hear calls
much better because volume is increased
and background noise and feedback are
diminished. The HAC setting improves only
the calls you listen to through the earpiece.
It does not affect calls heard on the
speakerphone or with a car kit or headset.
HAC requires extra battery power, so watch
your battery consumption when it's turned
on.
1 Press Phone
2 Press Menu
68
.
.
WHAT ARE ALL THOSE ICONS?
What are all those
icons?
You can monitor the status of several items
using icons in the title bar of the Phone
application:
Wireless Your phone is on and you are in
Service your wireless service provider’s
coverage area. If you are outside
Name
a coverage area, No Service or
Roaming appears instead.
No Service means that there is
no coverage at all, and Roaming
means that another wireless
service provider’s network is
available. When you turn off your
phone, Phone Off appears.
You are outside your wireless
service provider’s coverage area
and are roaming on another
wireless service provider’s
network. This icon appears in
addition to the word Roaming.
The icon may flash if the provider
is not on your wireless service
provider’s preferred roaming list.
Your phone is on. The bars
display the signal strength. The
stronger the signal, the more
bars that appear. If you are
outside a coverage area, no bars
appear.
You are in an area that supports
1xRTT data services.
You are in an area that supports
EVDO data services.
Your phone is on and is
connected to a 1xRTT network,
but you are not actively
transmitting data. You can still
make and answer calls.
Your phone is on and is
connected to an EVDO network,
but you are not actively
transmitting data. You can still
make and answer calls.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
Your phone is on and a 1xRTT
data connection is active. You
can still make calls, but you
cannot answer calls (incoming
calls go to voicemail). When you
make a call the data transmission
is automatically interrupted.
Your phone is on and an EVDO
data connection is active. You
can still make or answer calls.
When you make or answer a call,
the data transmission is
automatically interrupted, and
then it resumes when you end
the call.
You have new voicemail
messages. You can select this
icon to retrieve your messages.
WHAT ARE ALL THOSE ICONS?
69
CHAPTER
3
YOUR PHONE
You have a new alert, such as a
Calendar alarm or a new text
message. To view the alert,
press and hold Center
or
select the icon. See Viewing and
using the alerts.
TTY/TDD Mode is active. Use
this mode to communicate by
telephone if you are deaf or hard
of hearing or if you have speech
or language disabilities.
The Location setting is on and
your longitude and latitude
position are available to the
network and third-party
applications. When you select
the Emergency Only setting,
this icon appears with a red slash
and your location is available only
during emergency calls.
The Bluetooth® wireless
technology icon appears in gray
when this feature is off, in blue
when this feature is on, and in
reverse blue when your
smartphone is communicating
with another Bluetooth device.
70
WHAT ARE ALL THOSE ICONS?
This icon replaces the Bluetooth
icon when your smartphone is
connected to a Bluetooth
headset or car kit. This icon
appears in dark blue when a call
is in progress and in light blue
when a call is not in progress.
This icon replaces the Bluetooth
icon when a dial-up networking
connection using Bluetooth
wireless technology is active.
Your battery is partially drained.
When the battery drains to 20%
of its capacity, the icon changes
from blue to red. At 10% of its
capacity, you begin to receive
warning messages, and at 5% of
its capacity, the smartphone
beeps (if the Ringer switch is set
to Sound On
) and the icon
changes from red to clear.
Your battery is charging. The
lightning bolt turns from red to
green when the battery is fully
charged and your smartphone
remains connected to the
charger.
Your battery is fully charged and
your smartphone is not
connected to the charger.
You have new text messages.
The numbers next to the icon
indicate the number of unread
messages in your Inbox. You can
select this icon to retrieve your
messages.
Displays the current (or next)
event from the Calendar
application. If you have an event
conflict during the current time
period, a red bar appears next to
the event description. To jump to
the current event in the Calendar
application, select the Calendar
status line (see Displaying your
calendar for details).
KEY TERM 1xRTT (Single carrier [1x] radio
transmission technology): A wireless
technology that can provide fast data transfer
and Internet access with average speeds of
60–80Kbps and bursts up to 144Kbps.
3
CHAPTER
YOUR PHONE
KEY TERM EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized):
A wireless broadband technology that is
designed for very high speed data transfer
with average download speeds of 400–
700Kbps, and capable of reaching download
speeds of up to 1.8Mbps and upload speeds
of up to 156Kbps.
DID YOU KNOW? You can tap the Bluetooth icon
to quickly turn Bluetooth wireless features on
and off.
To display the remaining battery power, tap
the battery icon at the top of the screen.
TIP
WHAT ARE ALL THOSE ICONS?
71
YOUR PHONE
CHAPTER
3
72
WHAT ARE ALL THOSE ICONS?
C H A PT ER
4
Your email and other
messages
You already know how efficient email and messaging are for
staying in touch. Now your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone
brings you a new level of convenience: email on the go. Enjoy
the ease and speed of communicating with friends, family, and
colleagues anywhere you can access your wireless service
provider’s data network.
You can send photos to your friends and family, or create
Microsoft® Word or Excel® files and send them to your
colleagues. You can also receive attachments to view and edit
at your convenience.
Benefits
•
Access email on the go
•
Send and receive photos, sound
files, Word and Excel files, and
more
•
Save messages from your
computer to view at a convenient
time
In this chapter
Which application should I use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
The VersaMail® application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Which application
should I use?
Your smartphone includes the VersaMail®
application (called Email in Applications
View), which you can use to access your
corporate, personal, and fee-based Internet
email. You can also access web-based
email, like Yahoo! Mail or Hotmail, from the
web browser on your smartphone.
NOTE Your wireless service provider may
offer additional email applications that are
compatible with your Treo 755P
smartphone. Contact your wireless service
provider’s customer service department for
more info.
An email application is not an email
provider. It works with an account from a
provider to transfer messages to
your smartphone.
TIP
KEY TERM Email provider
The service you
use to send and receive email. Your email
provider’s name appears between the @
symbol and the dot symbol in your email
address.
BEFORE YOU BEGIN You must activate
data services on your wireless service
provider account before you can use email
on your smartphone.
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
The VersaMail®
application
Before you can use the VersaMail
application, you need to enter your email
account settings. If you have multiple email
accounts, you must enter settings for each
email account.
You can find additional information on
using and customizing the VersaMail
application in the User Guide for the
VersaMail® Application at http://
go.palm.com/treo755p/.
NOTE The instructions in this section
apply only to the version of VersaMail that
came with your smartphone. If you
upgrade to a newer version of VersaMail,
please refer to the instructions included
with that version.
WHICH APPLICATION SHOULD I USE?
75
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
How do I get started?
1 If either of the following is true, see the
User Guide for the VersaMail®
Application:
•
You used the VersaMail application on
your previous Palm OS® device, and
you want to transfer those settings to
your smartphone.
•
You plan to use VersaMail to access
an email account on a Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync® server, a Lotus
Notes server, or a Microsoft MAPI
server.
2 If your email provider is listed here, skip
to Setting up the VersaMail application
to work with common providers.
Prodigy, Speakeasy, USA.net, Verizon
DSL, and Yahoo!
3 If your email provider’s name is not
listed, you need to obtain the following
info from your system administrator or
ISP, and then skip to Setting up the
VersaMail application to work with other
providers:
•
Mail protocol: POP or IMAP
•
Incoming and outgoing mail server
names, such as mail.myisp.com
•
Incoming and outgoing mail server
port numbers, such as 110 (incoming
POP), 143 (incoming IMAP), or 25
(outgoing POP or IMAP)
•
(If necessary) Security settings: APOP,
ESMTP, SSL
Canada: Rogers High Speed and
Sympatico
Mexico: Yahoo!
United States: AOL, Apple.Mac, AT&T
Global, AT&T Worldnet, Bell South,
Cablevision, Charter, Comcast,
CompuServe, Concentric, Covad, Cox
Central, Cox East, Cox West, EarthLink,
Gmail, *HotMail/MSN, Juno, Mail.com,
NetZero, RCN, SBC/PacBell, SBC/
76
THE VERSAMAIL® APPLICATION
The correct protocol, server, and security
settings are required for the VersaMail
application to be able to send and receive
email for your account. Your email provider
can easily provide these settings. You may be
able to find this account setup info on your
email provider’s website.
TIP
Setting up the VersaMail application to
work with common providers
1 Press Applications
and select
Email
to open the VersaMail
application.
2 If the Initial Setup dialog box appears,
select Continue.
3 Make up a name that describes this
account and enter it in the Account
Name field. For example, Work Email.
4 Select the Mail Service pick list, select
your email provider (such as Earthlink),
and then select Next.
address. Check with your email provider if
you are not sure what to enter as your
username.
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
6 Select the Password box, enter your
email account password, select OK, and
then select Next.
7 Select Next, and then select Done.
To enter settings for another email
account, open the Accounts menu and select
Account Setup.
TIP
Setting up the VersaMail application to
work with other providers
1 Press Applications
and select
Email
to open the VersaMail
application.
2 If the Initial Setup dialog box appears,
select Continue.
3 Make up a name that describes this
account and enter it in the Account
Name field. For example, Work Email.
5 Enter the username for your email
account. Your username appears before
the @ symbol in your email address.
NOTE For some email providers, such as
4 Select the Mail Service pick list, and
then select Other.
5 Select the Protocol pick list, select POP
or IMAP (based on the info you got from
Gmail, your username is your entire email
THE VERSAMAIL® APPLICATION
77
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
your system administrator or ISP), and
then select Next.
settings, select Advanced, and then
enter those settings.
TIP You can also select Advanced to set more
options for incoming and outgoing messages.
10 Select Done.
Creating and sending email messages
1 From the Inbox, select New.
6 Enter the username for your email
account. Your username appears before
the @ symbol in your email address.
NOTE For some email providers, such as
Gmail, your username is your entire email
address. Check with your email provider if
you are not sure what to enter as your
username.
7 Select the Password box, enter your
email account password, select OK, and
then select Next.
8 Enter your email address and the
names of the incoming and outgoing
mail servers, and then select Next.
9 If your system administrator or ISP
provided port numbers or security
78
THE VERSAMAIL® APPLICATION
2 Begin entering one of the following for
the addressee:
•
Email address
•
First name
•
Last name
If you enter address info that matches one
or more of your contacts, the VersaMail
application displays the matching contacts. To
accept a suggestion, select the correct
contact. To send to a different address, keep
entering the email address or name.
TIP
3 Enter the subject and message text.
To move between fields, press Up or
Down on the 5-way.
TIP
4 Select one of the following:
Send: Connects and sends all
messages immediately. If the message
cannot be sent for any reason, the
message is stored in your Outbox.
Outbox: Stores the message to be sent
later.
Adding attachments to your email
messages
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
You can attach several types of files to your
email messages.
.
To remove an attachment, select the file in
the Attachments box, and then select
Delete.
TIP
Drafts: Saves the message so you can
continue working on it at another time.
Attaching photos and videos
Cancel: Returns to the message list
without saving the message.
1 Create the message to which you want
to attach the photo or video.
2 On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
3 From the Type pick list, select Photo/
Video.
DID YOU KNOW? The VersaMail application
makes up to five attempts to send a message;
if it is still not successful, an alert message
appears and you must try to manually send
the message again.
THE VERSAMAIL® APPLICATION
79
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
4 On the Select Media screen, select the
Album pick list to go to the album
containing the photo or video you want,
and then check the box to the left of the
photo or video.
5 Select Done.
.
To attach more than one file to a message,
repeat steps 3 and 4.
TIP
Attaching ringtones
1 Create the message to which you want
to attach the ringtone.
2 On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
3 From the Type pick list, select Sounds.
Ringtones that are copy-protected appear
in the Sounds application with a lock icon. You
can use these ringtones on your phone, but
you cannot send them as attachments.
TIP
80
Attaching Word, Excel®, PowerPoint®, and
PDF files
1 Create the message to which you want
to attach the file.
2 On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
3 From the Type pick list, select
Documents.
4 Select the file you want on the
Documents screen.
5 Select Done.
Attaching other types of files
1 Create the message to which you want
to attach the item.
2 On the New Message screen, select
the red paper clip
icon in the
upper-right corner.
3 From the Type pick list, select the type
of file to attach—for example, Address,
Appointment, or Memo/Text.
4 Select the ringtone you want, and then
select Insert.
4 Select the item you want from the list in
the Type box.
5 Select Done.
5 Select Done.
THE VERSAMAIL® APPLICATION
Receiving and viewing email messages
1 From any mailbox, select Get or Get &
Send.
2 From the Inbox, select the message you
want to view.
When viewing a message, tap the scroll
arrows at the top of the screen to view the
previous or next message.
TIP
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
4 Select Done.
Viewing attachments
There are a number of attachment types
you can open with the built-in software
on your smartphone (for example,
Microsoft Word, Excel, and PowerPoint
files; PDF files; ringtones; and photos).
1 From any folder, open the message with
the attachment you want to view.
Messages with downloaded
attachments appear with a paper clip
icon to the left of the message icon.
If an attachment is not downloaded
because it is larger than your maximum
message size, the paper clip icon does not
appear, and the attachment is not displayed at
the bottom of the message screen. Select
More to download and display any
attachments.
TIP
3 If a large incoming message is
truncated, select More
.
THE VERSAMAIL® APPLICATION
81
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
2 Tap the attachment name at the bottom
of the message screen to view it in the
default viewer on your smartphone.
You can also tap the folder icon to the left
of the attachment name to open a menu of
tasks you can do with the attachment,
including View, Install, or Unzip, depending
on the attachment file type; Save to card to
save the attachment to an expansion card; or
select Viewer to select the application you
want to use to view the attachment.
DID YOU KNOW? The VersaMail application
sends all messages as plain text only, with all
HTML tags stripped, even if you are
forwarding or replying to a message that was
originally received as HTML.
TIP
3 After you finish with the attachment,
select Done to return to the
Attachments dialog box.
4 Select Send.
to
Replying to or forwarding email
messages
When you respond to messages, you can
select whether to include the original text
(see Customizing your email settings).
82
THE VERSAMAIL® APPLICATION
2 In Message View, select Reply. Select
whether to reply to just the sender or to
reply to both the sender and all
addressees on the message.
3 Enter your reply.
NOTE If there is no Done button, press
Applications
and select Email
return to the account’s Inbox.
1 From the Inbox or another folder, open
the message you want to respond to.
Managing your messages
The status icons that appear near the
messages in your Inbox indicate the
following:
0
The message is unread when the
subject appears in bold.
The message includes an
attachment.
The message includes a meeting
invitation.
This message has high priority.
3 Select Delete on the Message menu.
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
4 If a confirmation dialog box appears,
select OK to confirm the deletion.
To delete a single message, select the
envelope icon next to the message, and then
select Delete from the list.
TIP
You can rearrange the message list to
make it easier to find and view messages.
•
•
In the Inbox, select Sort, and then
select one of the following: Sort by
Date, Sort by Name, or Sort by Subject.
To quickly switch between folders in list
view, select the folder pick list at the top
of the screen and select the desired
folder.
Deleting selected messages from the
Inbox
When you delete a message from the
Inbox, it moves to the Trash folder.
1 Select the bullet next to the icon of each
message that you want to delete. To
select adjacent messages, drag the
stylus so that it touches the bullet to the
left of each message. Lift the stylus and
drag again to select more adjacent
messages.
2 Press Menu
.
Deleting messages by date
You can quickly delete a group of
messages by selecting a range of dates.
1 Press Menu
.
2 Select Delete Old on the Message
menu.
3 Select the folder and a date range for
the messages you want to delete.
4 Select OK.
5 If a confirmation dialog box appears,
select OK to confirm the deletion.
To empty (or purge) the Trash folder, open
the Message menu and select Empty Trash.
TIP
Switching accounts
If you create more than one email account
in the VersaMail application, you need to
switch from account to account to get,
THE VERSAMAIL® APPLICATION
83
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
send, and otherwise manage the
messages in each account.
1 Press Menu
.
2 Select Accounts, and then select an
account.
DID YOU KNOW? If you assign the VersaMail
application to a quick button, you can press
that button repeatedly to switch between your
different email accounts.
Customizing your email settings
You can customize the VersaMail settings
for each individual email account on your
smartphone. The preferences you set apply
only to the email account you are currently
viewing. If you have multiple accounts,
configure each account separately.
Here are some examples of settings you
can customize:
84
•
Set a schedule to automatically retrieve
email messages.
•
Set preferences for how and when
messages are retrieved.
•
Add a signature to an outgoing
message.
THE VERSAMAIL® APPLICATION
For complete information on all the email
settings you can customize, see the User
Guide for the VersaMail® Application at
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.
Scheduling Auto Sync
You can set up the VersaMail application to
automatically download new email
messages to your smartphone with the
Auto Sync feature.
You need to set up a separate Auto Sync
schedule for each email account. This feature
may not work with email accounts that require
a VPN connection. For additional info on using
the VersaMail application with a VPN
connection, see Connecting to a virtual private
network (in this guide) and the User Guide for
the VersaMail® Application at http://
go.palm.com/treo755p/.
TIP
1 Press Menu
.
2 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3 Select Auto Sync.
After you set up a scheduled Auto Sync
and select Get Mail, from then on, only new
messages are retrieved during Auto Sync.
TIP
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
Selecting alert tones
4 Check the Auto-sync box.
5 Select the Every pick list and select the
time interval, from 5 minutes to
12 hours.
NOTE If you set a more frequent interval,
you may need to recharge your Treo battery
more often.
6 Select the Start Time and End Time
boxes, and then select the hour, the
minute, and AM or PM to enter the time
for the first and last Auto Sync to take
place. Select OK.
7 Select the days you want the schedule
to be active. You can choose any
number of days, but you can set up only
one schedule for each email account.
8 Select OK, and then select Get Mail.
When you schedule Auto Sync for a given
account, you can choose a sound—such as
a bird, a phone, or an alarm—to let you
know when new email arrives.
1 From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
.
2 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3 Select Alerts.
4 Check the Alert me of new mail box.
To receive notifications of successful Auto
Sync retrievals only, uncheck the Alert me of
auto sync failures box. Leave the box
checked if you want to receive notifications of
both successful and failed Auto Sync
retrievals.
TIP
5 Select the Alert Sound pick list, and
then select a sound. Your Treo 755P
smartphone plays a brief demo of the
sound.
THE VERSAMAIL® APPLICATION
85
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
6 Select OK.
Setting preferences for getting messages
1 From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
.
2 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
3 Select Incoming.
according to the option you select in the
Get pick list.
Unread messages (IMAP accounts
only): Downloads only unread mail to
your smartphone. If you don’t check this
box and you select Get & Send, all the
messages on your mail server are
downloaded to your Inbox, including
messages you’ve read.
The POP protocol does not support
retrieval of only unread mail from the server. If
you have a POP email account, the VersaMail
application downloads all messages
regardless of whether you have read them,
and regardless of whether the Unread
messages box is checked.
TIP
4 Set any of the following preferences,
and then select OK:
Get: Indicates whether to get message
subjects only or entire messages.
Ask Every Time: Indicates if you want
to see a dialog box for selecting
subjects only or entire messages each
time you retrieve email. If the box is
unchecked, messages are retrieved
86
THE VERSAMAIL® APPLICATION
Mail from last: Gets messages sent
within the number of days you specify.
Download attachments: Automatically
downloads files attached to email,
except for attachments that exceed the
maximum message size.
Maximum message size: Sets the
maximum size of an incoming email
message. Enter the size in kilobytes
(KB). The default is 5KB, but you can
enter any size up to 2048KB
[approximately 2 megabytes (MB)],
including attachments. The maximum
message size that you can retrieve is
60KB for the body text and
approximately 5MB of total data for any
attachments.
3 Select Signature.
Message Format: Sets the format for
messages you retrieve.
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync works with
the VersaMail application, Calendar, and
Contacts on your smartphone to directly
access corporate groupware information
on a Microsoft Exchange 2003 or 2007
server. Information in these applications is
pushed directly from the server to your
smartphone or wirelessly synchronizes
directly with the server from your
smartphone without using a desktop
computer.
HTML: Displays messages sent in
HTML format with basic formatting
intact and displays other messages as
plain text.
Text: Displays all messages as plain
text, regardless of the format in which
they were sent.
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
4 Check the Attach Signature box.
5 Enter your signature information, and
then select OK.
Working with Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync
Attaching a signature to a message
You can attach a personal signature, with
info like your company’s address and
phone numbers, to the bottom of all
messages you send.
1 From any mailbox screen, press
Menu
.
2 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
When you create a Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync account in the VersaMail
application, your email, calendar, and
contact info is pushed from or syncs
directly with the server; information does
not sync with Microsoft Outlook® (sold
separately) on your computer. Other
information that is stored on your
computer, such as tasks and memos,
THE VERSAMAIL® APPLICATION
87
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
continues to synchronize with Outlook on
your computer.
For complete info on using a Microsoft
Exchange ActiveSync account, see the
User Guide for the VersaMail® Application
at http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.
DID YOU KNOW? You can address messages to
multiple recipients by separating the
addresses with a comma. If you address a
single message to three people, you may be
billed for three messages (depending on your
wireless service provider’s service plan).
Creating and sending a text message
Messaging
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Make sure your
phone is turned on (see Turning your phone
on and off) and that you are in a coverage
area.
Each text message can hold up to 160
characters. (If you send a text message to
an email address, the email address is
deducted from the 160-character count.)
1 Press Applications
Messaging
.
and select
2 Select New.
You can use the Messaging application to
exchange brief text messages (SMS) with
other devices and email addresses that
support this form of messaging. Before
you use your smartphone to send or
receive messages, refer to your service
plan for pricing and availability of
messaging services.
88
MESSAGING
3 Select the To field to address the
message:
•
Press Center
. If the recipient’s
name appears in the list of recent
addresses, select it from the list.
•
If the recipient is in your Contacts list,
enter the first initial and last name (no
spaces), and then select the
recipient’s phone number or email
address, depending on where you
want to send the message.
•
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
If the recipient’s name isn’t in the list
of recent addresses or your Contacts
list, enter the phone number or email
address.
If you see numbers when you expect to
see letters (or the other way around), you
need to turn Option Lock on by pressing
Option twice, or turn it off by pressing
Option once.
TIP
4 Enter your message or select
QuickText
to insert predefined
phrases. To insert emoticons, select
5 (Optional) Press Menu
, and then
select High Priority from the Compose
menu to mark the message as urgent.
.
To add a new QuickText phrase, select
Edit QuickText from the list.
TIP
NOTE Some symbols can’t be used in text
messages. The Messaging application
automatically replaces invalid characters.
6 Select Send.
Select Save as Draft to save a draft of the
message without sending it. To access the
draft, select the folder list in the title bar and
select Drafts.
TIP
Receiving messages
When your phone is turned on and you are
in a wireless coverage area, you
automatically receive new text messages.
You can also configure how your
smartphone notifies you when a new
message arrives (see Selecting Messaging
alert tones).
MESSAGING
89
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
CHAPTER
4
When you receive a message, you can
also press Send to call the sender.
TIP
If you have multiple alerts, the Alert
screen displays all your pending alerts. Select
an item’s description to jump to that item, or
check the box to clear that item. To view all
your pending alerts from any screen on your
smartphone, press and hold Center on the
5-way.
TIP
The new message alert may include any of
the following buttons:
Using links in messages
Reply: Opens Chat View, where you can
reply with a text message.
When you receive a text message that
contains a telephone number, email
address, or URL, you can dial the number,
send an email message, or go to the web
page immediately.
Call Back: Dials the sender’s phone
number.
1 Press Applications
Messaging
.
Go To Msg: Opens the message so you
can view its full contents.
2 Select the message that contains the
link you want to use.
Delete: Removes the message from your
smartphone.
3 Select the phone number, email
address, or URL (appears as underlined
blue text).
OK: Dismisses the alert and places the
message in your Inbox.
and select
Your smartphone automatically launches
the appropriate application from the link.
90
MESSAGING
Arranging your messages
You can rearrange the messages in any
folder by using the Sort command.
1 Press Applications
Messaging
.
and select
1 Press Applications
Messaging
.
and select
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
2 Select the folder list in the title bar and
select the folder that contains the
messages you want to delete.
3 Press Menu
.
4 Select Purge from the Message menu.
5 Select the Purge pick list, and then
select older than 1 week, older than 2
weeks, older than 1 month, or all.
6 Select OK.
Chatting with Messaging
2 Select the folder list in the title bar and
select the folder you want to sort.
3 Press Menu
.
4 Select View, and then select Sort by
Name or Sort by Date.
Deleting messages
You can delete several messages at once
from any folder by using the Purge
command.
DID YOU KNOW? You can send and receive text
messages even while you are on a phone call.
This is easiest when using a hands-free
headset or the speakerphone.
When you exchange more than one
message with a single contact, the
messages you exchange with that person
are grouped into a chat session. When you
select a chat session from your message
list, the upper part of Chat View displays all
messages you’ve exchanged with this
contact, and the lower part provides an
entry area.
MESSAGING
91
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
You can carry on multiple chats at the same
time and easily switch between them,
using the pick list at the top of the screen.
1 Press Applications
Messaging
.
and select
2 Do one of the following:
Start a new chat: Select a message
and reply to it.
Continue an existing chat: Select a
message with the chat
icon.
3 Enter your message.
Pale gray text indicates that a message is
pending or enroute.
TIP
4 Select Send.
92
MESSAGING
Customizing your Messaging settings
1 Press Applications
Messaging
.
2 Press Menu
and select
.
3 From the Options menu, select
Preferences.
4 On the Messages tab, set any of the
following preferences for your individual
messages:
Confirm message deletions: Indicate
whether you want deletion confirmation
prompts to appear.
Privacy Mode (hide text): Indicate
whether you want the body text to
appear in the alert when you receive a
new message, or if you want the alert
to hide the text and prompt you to go to
the message.
5 Select the Chat tab and set any of the
following preferences for chat sessions.
in the selected label color, or only your
name.
4
CHAPTER
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
6 Select OK.
Selecting Messaging alert tones
DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a
silent alert that can vibrate even when the
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off.
Create chats from messages: Indicate
when you want to group messages
from the same person into a chat.
1 Press Applications
Messaging
.
2 Press Menu
and select
.
3 Select Options, and then select Alerts.
Show timestamps in chats: Indicate
whether you want to see the local date
and time the message was sent next to
each message.
Display my name in chat window as:
Enter the name you want to use as the
label for your messages in Chat View.
Label color: Select a color to
differentiate your messages from the
sender’s messages while in Chat View.
Use color for: Indicate whether you
want both your name and message text
4 Select the Application pick list and
select Messaging.
5 Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
MESSAGING
93
CHAPTER
4
YOUR EMAIL AND OTHER MESSAGES
6 Select the Vibrate pick list and select
how you want your smartphone to
vibrate upon an incoming message.
7 Select the Message Tone pick list and
select a tone for incoming message
alerts.
A text message
A chat session
8 Check the boxes if you want to see
onscreen alerts when a new message
arrives and when a message you sent is
received.
A voicemail page
9 Select Done.
A message that is waiting to be sent
What are all those icons?
A message that was successfully
sent
By default, the Messaging app shows the
Inbox folder. To view a different folder, select
the folder list in the title bar and select a
different folder from the list.
TIP
The message descriptions in the Inbox,
Outbox, and Sent folders show the
message status:
94
The following icons show the message
type and additional status info:
•
Unread messages appear in bold.
•
Read messages appear in plain text.
•
Urgent messages appear with a red
exclamation point (!).
MESSAGING
An incoming message with an error
A message that was sent to multiple
recipients, and only some of the
recipients received the message
An outgoing message with an error
DID YOU KNOW? If you are outside a coverage
area or if your phone is turned off, outgoing
messages go into the Outbox. When you
return to a coverage area or turn your phone
back on, your pending messages are sent
automatically and transferred to the Sent
folder.
C H A PT ER
5
Your connections to the web
and wireless devices
You use the web for many things: driving directions, shopping,
news, web-based email. Now, with your wireless service
provider’s network and the built-in web browser, you can take
the web with you almost anywhere.
The built-in Bluetooth® feature of your Palm® Treo™ 755P
smartphone helps you easily set up wireless connections to a
number of devices, so you can enjoy the convenience of
cable-free connectivity. You can also use your smartphone to
share contacts or your favorite photos with other people.
Benefits
•
Carry the web with you
•
Store web pages for offline
viewing
•
Connect to Bluetooth devices
In this chapter
Web browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Connections with Bluetooth® devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Web browser
The Blazer® web browser on your
smartphone provides quick and easy
access to web pages. You can view most
sites you use on your computer, including
those with security and advanced features,
such as JavaScript and frames. To browse
the web, you must activate data services
from your wireless service provider.
pages into a single column and resizes
images on your screen. This way, you can
see most content without scrolling left or
right.
5
CHAPTER
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
DID YOU KNOW? You can send email from a web
page on your smartphone. Email addresses
appear as links on web pages. After you
configure an email application on your
smartphone, you can select an email address
link to create a message to the selected
address.
DID YOU KNOW? You can visit secure websites.
The security certificates and 128-bit Secure
Sockets Layer (SSL) encryption let you
browse secure sites, such as online shopping,
banking, and email. Remember: Some secure
sites also require specific browsers and may
not work with the web browser application.
DID YOU KNOW? The web browser supports
JavaScript, SSL strong encryption, and
cookies, but does not support plug-ins (such
as Flash or Shockwave) or Java applets.
Viewing a web page
The web browser uses patent-pending
technology to optimize web pages for your
smartphone. By default, the browser is in
Optimized Mode, which reformats web
1 Make sure your phone is turned on (see
Turning your phone on and off) and that
you are in a coverage area.
2 Press Applications
Web
.
and select
WEB BROWSER
97
CHAPTER
5
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
NOTE Trouble connecting to the Internet?
See My smartphone won’t connect to the
Internet for troubleshooting tips.
3 Enter a web page address (URL) in the
Address Bar and select Go.
page. In Wide Page mode, use the
stylus to select a link.
Submit a form: Enter the info and then
select the onscreen button to submit
the form. If the form doesn’t have an
onscreen button, press Return
.
NOTE If you browse to a secure web
page, a lock
Address Bar.
icon appears in the
4 Do any of the following to navigate
within the web page:
View a page in wide layout format (as
on your computer): Press Menu
,
select Options, and then select Wide
Page Mode.
Scroll through the page: In Optimized
Mode (the default format, which is
optimized for your smartphone screen),
press Up
or Down . In Wide Page
Mode, press Up , Down , Left ,
or Right to scroll in all directions.
Follow a link to another web page: In
Optimized Mode, highlight the link by
pressing Left or Right , and then
press Center
to go to the selected
98
WEB BROWSER
TIP To adjust the font size, open the Options
menu and select Font. To fit more text on the
screen, select Small. To make the text easier
to read, select Large.
5 Use the 5-way
to access any of
the following icons in the title bar:
Goes to the previous web page.
Goes to the next web page.
Refreshes the page with the
latest content from the Internet.
Opens a list where you can
select Fast Mode (no images or
style sheets) or Normal Mode
(with images and style sheets).
Opens a dialog box where you
can enter a web address you
want to go to or view a list of
recently viewed web pages.
Goes to your home page.
Displays a list of your
bookmarks and saved pages.
To find a recent page or search, select the
Address Bar pick list and select the item from
the list.
TIP
Want to get to the icons faster? Press
Space to jump to the Address Bar, and then
press Up on the 5-way to scroll to the icons.
You can also press Menu to access the same
commands from the menus.
TIP
to 100 bookmarks or saved pages, allowing
you to open your favorite web pages
quickly. Note that a bookmark is different
from a favorite (see Defining favorite
buttons).
5
CHAPTER
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
DID YOU KNOW? The predefined bookmarks
take you to pages that are optimized for your
smartphone.
1 Go to the page you want to bookmark.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Add Bookmark from the Page
menu.
4 (Optional) Change the entries in the
Name and Description fields.
5 Select OK, and then select OK again.
You can customize the Fast Mode
settings. See Customizing your web browser
settings for details.
TIP
Tap and hold the Back or Forward buttons
or select these buttons with the 5-way to pop
up a list of sites you’ve visited.
TIP
Creating a bookmark
With bookmarks you can instantly access a
web page without entering the address
every time. The web browser can store up
WEB BROWSER
99
CHAPTER
5
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
Saving a page
You can use the web browser to save a
page for offline viewing, so you don’t need
a wireless connection to view it later.
1 Go to the page you want to save.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Save Page from the Page menu.
4 Select OK, and then select OK again.
To go back to the last web page you
viewed without selecting a bookmark, select
Page View.
TIP
Viewing bookmarks or saved pages
Bookmarks and saved pages both appear in
Bookmarks View. Saved pages are
indicated by a small triangle in the
upper-right corner of the bookmark.
? You can make Bookmarks View
DID YOU KNOW
the default view when you open the browser.
Open the Options menu and select
Preferences. Select the Start With pick list
and select Bookmarks.
1 Select the Bookmarks View
icon.
2 Select the bookmark or saved page you
want to view.
100
WEB BROWSER
Editing or deleting a bookmark or saved
page
1 From Bookmarks View, press
Menu
.
2 Select Edit Bookmarks on the
Bookmarks menu.
3 Select the bookmark you want to edit or
delete.
5
CHAPTER
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
Your wireless service provider may preset
bookmarks on your smartphone that are
customized for their services. You may not be
able to customize some of the preset
bookmarks. If you can’t edit, delete, or beam
a bookmark, it is probably locked and these
actions are prohibited.
TIP
4 Enter the desired changes.
5 Select OK.
Arranging bookmarks and saved pages
Bookmarks View includes ten pages for
bookmarks so that you can arrange
bookmarks and saved pages in a logical
fashion. For example, you can store travel
links on one bookmark page, stock links on
another, and business links on a third page.
1 From Bookmarks View, press
Menu
.
2 Select Edit Bookmarks from the
Bookmarks menu.
3 Enter a title for this page of bookmarks.
4 Use the stylus to drag and drop a
bookmark into the desired slot. You can
move a bookmark within the current
page or move it to a different bookmark
page by dragging and dropping it on the
Bookmark Page
icon.
5 Select OK.
Downloading files from a web page
The web browser lets you download files
that are recognized by one of the
applications on your smartphone. When
you download a file, you can open it in the
application that recognizes the file. For
example, download an MP3 file so you can
listen to it later in the Pocket Tunes™
application. If a file is not recognized by any
of the applications on your smartphone,
WEB BROWSER
101
CHAPTER
5
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
you can download the file to an expansion
card, but you cannot open it on your
smartphone.
You can download files such as new
applications, and choose to play or save
music and video files in many popular
formats—provided that the website
permits the downloading of files:
Item
Supported File Types
Pictures
JPEG, WBMP, GIF
Videos
MP4, 3G2, ASF, WMV
Ringtones
MIDI, AAC
Music
MP3, WMA
You can also access software and other
downloads using the Downloads bookmark.
4 Select Yes.
You can also save an image from a web
page by tapping and holding it with the stylus.
TIP
Streaming files from a web page
The web browser lets you stream files that
are recognized by one of the applications
on your smartphone. For example, you can
choose to play music and video files in
many popular formats (MP3, WMA, WMV).
1 When the web browser recognizes
streamed content on a web page, it
displays a Play
icon. To view or
listen to the streamed content, select
Play
.
TIP
1 Go to the page with the link to the file
you want to download.
2 Press Left or Right to highlight the
link to the file, and then press Center
.
3 If prompted, select what you want to do
with the file: Play, Save To Device, or
Save To Card.
102
WEB BROWSER
The web browser recognizes streamed
content that is not supported by any of the
applications on your smartphone, and it
displays a Media type not supported
message.
TIP
2 Once streaming begins, playback starts
automatically. Use the following
controls when viewing or listening:
•
Select
to return to the web page
containing the streamed content.
•
Select
or press Center
pause playback.
•
Select
or press Center
to
resume playback after pausing.
•
A few seconds after playback begins,
the toolbar is hidden and you can view
the content on the full screen. Press
Up
or Down
to display the
toolbar; press Up
or Down
again to hide the toolbar again.
•
to
Press the Volume button on the side
of your smartphone to adjust the
volume.
6 Select Edit, and then select Paste.
5
CHAPTER
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
DID YOU KNOW? If the web browser does not
recognize a phone number as dialable, you
can copy the phone number (as text) and
paste it into the Dial Pad (see Dialing from a
web page or message).
Returning to recently viewed pages
The History list stores the addresses of the
last 100 pages you visited. Items in the
History list are sorted chronologically.
1 From Page View, press Menu
.
2 Select History from the Page menu.
Copying text from a web page
You can copy text from a web page and
paste it into other applications.
1 Use the stylus to highlight the text you
want to copy.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Edit, and then select Copy.
4 Go to the app in which you want to
paste the text, and use the stylus or
5-way
to position the cursor
where you want to paste the text.
5 Press Menu
3 Press Down
list.
to navigate through the
4 Select the web page you want to load.
Finding text on a web page
1 From Page View, press Menu
.
2 Select Find Text on Page from the
Page menu.
3 Enter the text you want to find.
4 Check or uncheck the Wrap Search box
to indicate whether you want the search
.
WEB BROWSER
103
CHAPTER
5
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
to wrap from the end of the page to the
beginning when the end is reached.
5 Select Find to start the search.
Customizing your web browser settings
1 From Page View, press Menu
.
2 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
Show Address Bar: Sets whether the
web address appears in Page View.
When it is visible, you can select the
pick list to go to a previously viewed
page or enter a URL directly from Page
View.
4 Select General and set any of the
following preferences:
3 Select Page and set any of the following
preferences:
Start With: Determines which view
appears when you open the browser.
Auto-complete: Determines whether
the web browser suggests text, based
on your previous entries, when you
begin entering info.
Home Page: Sets the page that appears
when you select
.
Restore Default: Selects the original
home page, if you changed it.
104
WEB BROWSER
Disable cookies: Determines whether
websites can store personalized info on
your Treo smartphone. Some sites do
not work properly if you select this
option.
Disable JavaScript: Bypasses
JavaScript elements on the web pages
you view.
Tap and Drag: Determines whether
dragging the stylus selects text or
scrolls through the content of the page.
Normal mode/Fast mode: Determines
whether selected items are hidden so
that web pages load faster. When you
select Fast Mode, you can set the next
two options.
can still see any image by tapping and
holding its placeholder box.
5
CHAPTER
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
5 Select Advanced and set any of the
following preferences:
Set memory limit for storing pages:
Sets the memory available for your
cache. Pages are cached so that they
load faster the next time you view
them.
Disable cascading style sheets:
Determines whether style sheets are
applied when you load a web page.
When style sheets are disabled, pages
download faster, but you may lose
some of the formatting.
KEY TERM Cascading style sheets
A
method used to describe the presentation of
a web page or document written in a markup
language, such as HTML or XML.
Don’t download images! Determines
whether images appear when you load
a web page. If you select not to view
images, then web pages load faster. You
Cookies: Indicates how much memory
is being used by cookies. To free up this
memory, select Clear Cookies.
Cache: Indicates how much memory is
being used by your cache to store
recent pages and history. To free up this
memory, select Clear Cache.
WEB BROWSER
105
CHAPTER
5
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
Clear cache on exit: Determines
whether the cache clears each time you
exit the web browser.
Set Proxy: Sets up a proxy server to
access the Internet. If your connection
requires a proxy server, please contact
your Internet service provider or IT
administrator for this information.
6 Select OK.
Connections with
Bluetooth® devices
With your smartphone’s built-in Bluetooth
wireless technology, you can connect to a
number of Bluetooth devices, such as a
headset, car kit, printer, or GPS receiver, as
well as to other smartphones and
handhelds that are equipped with
Bluetooth wireless technology. If your
computer is enabled with Bluetooth
wireless technology, you can also
synchronize wirelessly.
106
CONNECTIONS WITH BLUETOOTH® DEVICES
You can create a list of Bluetooth devices
that you trust to communicate with your
Treo smartphone. When communicating
with trusted devices, your Treo smartphone
skips the discovery process and creates a
secure link as long as the device is within
range. Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet/10
meters, depending on environmental
conditions, including obstacles, radio
interference from nearby electronic
equipment, and other factors.
When you configure a headset as
described in Connecting to a Bluetooth
hands-free device, the headset is
automatically added to your trusted device
list. Follow the steps in this section to add
other devices to your trusted device list,
such as a friend’s handheld.
Requesting a connection with another
Bluetooth device
1 Press Applications
Bluetooth
.
2 Select Bluetooth On.
and select
6 Select Add Device. The discovery icon
appears, indicating that the discovery
process is active.
5
CHAPTER
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
7 Select the Show pick list and select
Nearby devices.
3 (Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your smartphone when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to re-create any
partnerships you have already created.
4 Select Setup Devices.
5 Select Trusted Devices.
8 If the device you want to add doesn’t
appear on the discovery results list,
make sure that the other device is ready
to receive a connection request (see the
device’s documentation), and then
select Find More on your smartphone
to search again.
9 Enter the same passkey on your
smartphone and on the Bluetooth
device, and select OK.
IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices
have a predefined passkey; if your device
has a predefined passkey, you can find it in
the documentation for that device. Other
devices provide a screen where you enter
a passkey that you make up. In either case,
you must use the same passkey on both
your smartphone and the other Bluetooth
device. We recommend that where
possible, you make up a passkey of 16
alphanumeric characters (letters and
numerals only) to improve the security of
your smartphone. The longer the passkey,
CONNECTIONS WITH BLUETOOTH® DEVICES
107
CHAPTER
5
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
the more difficult it is for the passkey to be
deciphered.
NOTE Use the same device name for all
10 Select Done.
your Bluetooth connections. If you change
the device name, you need to re-create any
partnerships you have already created.
Accepting a connection from another
Bluetooth device
4 Select the Visibility pick list and select
one of the following:
For the smartphone to be visible to
Bluetooth devices, the Bluetooth setting must
be set to On and visibility must be set to
Visible or Temporary.
TIP
1 Press Applications
Bluetooth
.
and select
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that
are not on your Trusted Device list to
request a connection with your
smartphone. Your smartphone remains
accessible to other devices until you
turn this option off. After you’ve finished
using this setting, remember to change
it back to Hidden.
2 Select Bluetooth On.
Use the Visible option only when you need
your smartphone to be accessible for an
extended period of time. For short-term
accessibility, use the Temporary option.
TIP
3 (Optional) Enter a device name that
identifies your smartphone when it is
discovered by other Bluetooth devices.
108
CONNECTIONS WITH BLUETOOTH® DEVICES
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices
that are not on your Trusted Device list
to request a connection with your
smartphone during the next two
minutes. Your smartphone reverts to
the Hidden setting and becomes
inaccessible to other devices after two
minutes.
Hidden: Allows only devices with which
you have previously formed a
partnership to request a connection
with your smartphone. New devices
cannot request a connection.
5 Enter the same passkey on your
smartphone and on the Bluetooth
device.
you must use the same passkey on both
your smartphone and the other Bluetooth
device. We recommend that where
possible, you make up a passkey of 16
alphanumeric characters (letters and
numerals only) to improve the security of
your smartphone. The longer the passkey,
the more difficult it is for the passkey to be
deciphered.
5
CHAPTER
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
IMPORTANT Some Bluetooth devices,
such as headsets and GPS receivers, have
a predefined passkey; if your device has a
predefined passkey, you can find it in the
documentation for that device. Other
devices provide a screen where you enter
a passkey that you make up. In either case,
6 (Optional) Check the Add to trusted
device list box if you want to form a
partnership with the requesting device.
7 Select OK.
CONNECTIONS WITH BLUETOOTH® DEVICES
109
YOUR CONNECTIONS TO THE WEB AND WIRELESS DEVICES
CHAPTER
5
110
CONNECTIONS WITH BLUETOOTH® DEVICES
C H A PT ER
6
Your photos, videos, and
music
Do you have a wallet bulging with photos of friends, family, pets,
and your most recent vacation? Are you tired of carrying both your
MP3 player and your phone?
Your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone solves both problems. You can
keep your favorite photos—videos, too—right on your
smartphone. And there’s no need to carry an expensive MP3
player; you can play music on your smartphone. Simply transfer
songs onto your smartphone or an expansion card (sold
separately) and then listen through your stereo headphones.
Benefits
•
Never be far from your favorite
people, places, and songs
•
Organize your photos, videos, and
songs
•
No separate photo viewer, MP3,
CD, or mini-disc player required
In this chapter
Camera and Camcorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Pics & Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Pocket Tunes™. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Camera and
Camcorder
location is based on the location of the
album (smartphone or expansion card).
Your smartphone comes with an
easy-to-use, built-in, 1.3-megapixel camera
with 2x digital zoom. You can use the
camera to take and view pictures and
videos and send them to your friends and
family. To add a personal touch to your
smartphone, use your pictures as your
wallpaper in the Phone application’s Main
View, and as caller ID images.
Taking a picture
You can store pictures on your smartphone
or on an expansion card.
1 Press Applications
Camera
.
and select
2 By default, the Camera application
stores pictures you take in the Palm
folder on your smartphone. To store a
picture in a different location, select one
of the following from the pick list:
<Album name>: Stores the picture in
the selected album. The storage
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
New Albums: Opens a dialog box where
you can enter an album name and
select the storage location (smartphone
or expansion card).
The camera defaults to 1.3 megapixel
(1280 x 1024) resolution. The camera also
supports VGA (640 x 480) and QVGA (320 x
240) resolution. To view these settings before
you take a picture, press Menu.
TIP
3 Find your subject in the screen on your
smartphone. (The lens is on the back of
your smartphone.)
4 (Optional) To get a close-up of your
subject, press Up
to select 2x. Press
Down
to return to 1x.
CAMERA AND CAMCORDER
113
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
5 Press Center
to capture the picture.
6 Do any of the following:
To add an audio caption later, open the
picture and then select Audio Caption from
the Photo menu.
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? You can personalize a picture.
Open the Photo menu, select Draw on, and
then use the drawing tools to add your own
personal touch. When you save the picture,
you can replace the original or save a copy.
Recording a video
You can store videos on your smartphone
or on an expansion card.
Saves the picture in the location
you selected in step 2.
Deletes the picture.
1 Press Applications
Camcorder
.
and select
The video recording screen displays the
approximate recording time you have left
based on the space available on your
smartphone or expansion card. Actual
recording time may vary depending on how
fast you are moving, how many colors you are
recording, and so on.
TIP
Opens a dialog box where you
can choose to attach the picture
to an email message or send it to
another device that uses
Bluetooth wireless technology.
Lets you add a voice caption.
2 By default, the Camcorder application
stores videos you record in the Palm
folder on your smartphone. To store a
114
CAMERA AND CAMCORDER
video in a different location, select one
of the following:
<Album name>: Stores the video in the
selected album. The storage location is
based on the location of the album
(smartphone or expansion card).
4 Press Center
to start recording.
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
5 After you finish recording, press
Center
again to stop.
6 Select any of the following:
Plays the video, so you can
review it.
New Albums: Opens a dialog box where
you can enter an album name and
select the storage location (smartphone
or expansion card).
The camcorder defaults to CIF (352 x 288)
resolution and also supports QCIF (176 x 144)
resolution. To view these settings before you
capture a video, press Menu.
TIP
3 Find your subject in the screen on your
smartphone. (The lens is on the back of
your smartphone.)
Saves the video in the location
you selected in step 2.
Deletes the video.
Opens a dialog box where you
can choose to attach the video to
an email message or send it to
another Bluetooth device.
Opens a dialog box where you
can adjust the volume during
playback.
CAMERA AND CAMCORDER
115
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
During playback, tap and drag the
progress indicator bar to jump to a different
section of the video. Select Pause to pause
video playback.
TIP
Customizing your Camera settings
You can customize the built-in camera’s
settings for your Treo 755P smartphone.
1 Go to Camera View or Camcorder View.
2 Press Menu
. If you are in Camera
View, the Photo Settings screen
appears. If you are in Camcorder View,
the Video Settings screen appears.
3 Set any of the following preferences:
Effects: Sets the color palette for the
current picture or video. You cannot
change an item’s palette after you take
the picture or video.
Prompt sound: (Pictures only) Sets the
sound that plays before you take
the picture.
Shutter sound: Determines whether a
sound plays when you take a picture or
video.
116
CAMERA AND CAMCORDER
Microphone: (Videos only) Turns the
microphone on and off so that you can
record videos with or without sound.
Resolution: Sets the default size for
newly captured pictures or videos.
Date stamp: (Pictures only) Determines
whether the date the picture is taken
appears on your pictures.
Review photos/videos: Determines
whether you can review pictures or
videos before saving them and how
quickly they are automatically saved.
Auto naming: Assigns a name to a
series of pictures or videos to be
captured, such as Seattle001,
Seattle002, and so on.
1 Press Applications
Pics&Videos
.
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
and select
2 Select the album that contains the
picture you want to see.
To view an album from an expansion card,
insert the card and select the album from the
Album list. If the items on the card are not
grouped into albums, select the card name
from the list.
TIP
4 Select Done.
3 Select the picture you want to view.
Pics & Videos
Viewing a picture
In addition to viewing the pictures you
capture with the built-in camera, you can
view pictures captured on many popular
digital cameras or downloaded from the
Internet. Your smartphone supports the
following picture formats:
•
JPG
•
TIF
•
BMP
•
GIF
4 Press Right or Left to scroll to the
next item in the album.
DID YOU KNOW? To see the outer edges of a
picture that may not be visible, use the stylus
to tap and drag the picture in any direction.
5 If the picture has a voice caption, select
to hear it.
6 Tap the picture or press Center
return to Thumbnail View.
to
In Thumbnail View, you can group photos
or videos to more easily locate them. Select
one of the grouping options from the View
menu.
TIP
PICS & VIDEOS
117
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
Viewing a video
In addition to viewing the videos you
capture with the built-in camera, you can
view videos captured on many popular
digital cameras. Your smartphone supports
the following types of video files:
DID YOU KNOW? If you pause video playback
and then close the video, the video starts
where you left off the next time you play it.
•
3GP
Viewing a slide show
•
3G2 (MPEG-4 video + QCELP audio +
.3g2 file type)
1 Press Applications
Pics&Videos
.
•
MP4
•
MPG
2 Highlight (or open) the album you want
to view.
•
M4V
•
ASF (with MPEG-4 video and
IMA-ADPCM audio)
•
AVI (with MJPEG video and PCM audio)
1 Press Applications
Pics&Videos
.
and select
2 Select the album that contains the video
you want to see.
3 Select the video you want to view.
Playback begins automatically.
4 Hold down Right or Left to seek
within the current video, or press Right
or Left to scroll to the next item in
the album.
118
5 Press Center
to return to
Thumbnail View.
PICS & VIDEOS
and select
3 (Optional) Press Menu
, select
Options, and then select Auto-hide
Toolbar Off if you want to see the
toolbar.
4 Press Space
show.
5 Press Center
previous view.
to start the slide
to return to the
To set slide show options such as
background music and transitions, open the
Options menu and select Slideshow
Setting. Keep in mind that background music
overrides audio captions when you’re running
a slide show. Background music for a slide
show also overrides any music that might be
playing using the Pocket Tunes application on
your smartphone if you start a slide show.
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? You cannot send copyrighted
pictures or videos that appear with a Lock icon
in Thumbnail View or Picture list.
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
4 Select Send.
Sending pictures or videos
You can attach pictures or videos to email
messages or send them to another
Bluetooth device.
1 From the Album list, select the album
that contains the picture(s) or video(s)
you want to send.
5 Select the method you want to use to
send the pictures or videos.
2 Tap
in the lower-right corner of the
screen.
6 (Optional) Enter any text you want to
add to the message.
3 Select the pictures or videos to send, or
select Select All to send the entire
album.
7 Address and send the message.
NOTE A + sign appears next to selected
items.
Copying a picture or video
You can copy pictures or videos into
another album. You can also copy pictures
and videos between your smartphone and
an expansion card.
PICS & VIDEOS
119
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
1 From the Album list, select the album
that contains the picture(s) or video(s)
you want to copy.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Copy to from the Photo (or
Video) menu.
4 Select the pictures or videos to copy, or
select Select All to copy the entire
album. (A + sign appears next to
selected items.)
You can also move pictures and videos
between albums. Open the Photo (or Video)
menu and select Move to. The remaining
steps are the same as copying pictures, but
use the Move commands instead of the Copy
commands.
TIP
Organizing pictures and videos
1 Open the album you want to organize.
5 Select Copy.
2 Press Menu
6 Select the Copy items to pick list and
select whether to copy the selected
items to your device or to an expansion
card.
3 Select Album, and then select Add to
album or Remove from album.
A + sign
indicates that
a picture is
selected
7 Select the Into album pick list and
select the album you want to copy the
selected items to.
120
8 Select Copy.
PICS & VIDEOS
.
4 Select the pictures or videos you want
to add or remove, or select Select All to
add or remove the entire album. (A +
sign indicates that you want to add the
item. An X sign indicates that you want
to remove the item.)
5 Select Add or Remove.
Adding a picture to a contact entry
? You can also open the Album
DID YOU KNOW
list from Camera View or Camcorder View by
selecting the icon in the lower-right corner.
Install the Palm® Files application to easily
browse and manage files on an expansion
card. Press Applications, select My Treo,
select the Bonus tab, and then select Files.
TIP
To change the name, add a caption, or
view other picture or video information,
highlight (or open) the item, open the Photo
(or Video) menu, and select Details.
TIP
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
1 Open the picture you want to add to a
contact.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Options, and then select Save
as Contact.
4 Select the contact you want to add this
picture to.
Rotating a picture
1 Open the picture you want to rotate.
Saving a picture as wallpaper
2 Press Menu
You can select a picture to use as wallpaper
for the Phone application’s Main View.
3 Select Rotate from the Photo menu.
.
4 Select the orientation.
1 Open the picture you want to save as
wallpaper.
Deleting a picture or video
2 Press Menu
1 Open the album that contains the
picture(s) or video(s) you want to delete.
.
3 Select Options, and then select Save
as Wallpaper.
4 When the confirmation message
appears, confirm by selecting Yes or
decline by selecting No.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Delete from the Photo (or
Video) menu.
4 Select the pictures or videos that you
want to delete, or select Select All to
delete the entire album. (An X sign
appears next to selected items.)
PICS & VIDEOS
121
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
5 Select Delete.
6 Select Delete to confirm the deletion.
You can also highlight a picture or video in
Thumbnail View and then press Backspace to
delete the highlighted item.
TIP
Viewing pictures and videos on your
computer
When you synchronize your Treo 755P
smartphone, your pictures and videos are
copied to your desktop computer. You can
view pictures in JPEG format and videos in
MPEG-4 format (3G2 file extension). You
can email them to friends using your
desktop email application.
You can view and edit synchronized
pictures and videos in the Palm Media
desktop application. Open Palm® Desktop
software and click the Media icon. For
information about using the Palm Media
desktop application, refer to the
Palm Desktop Online Help.
122
PICS & VIDEOS
If you want to manage photos and videos
directly from the location in which they’re
stored, you can find your pictures and
videos in the following locations:
Windows:
•
My Documents\ My Photos\Palm
Photos\ <user name>\Internal
•
My Documents\ My Photos\Palm
Photos\ <user name>\Expansion Card
•
My Documents\ My Videos\Palm
Videos\ <user name>\Internal
•
My Documents\ My Videos\Palm
Videos\<user name>\Expansion Card
Mac:
•
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :
Pictures : Palm Photos : <Palm device
name> : Internal
•
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :
Pictures : Palm Photos : <Palm device
name> : Expansion Card
•
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :
Movies : Palm Videos : <Palm device
name> : Internal
•
Mac HD : Users : <Mac user name> :
Movies : Palm Videos : <Palm device
name> : Expansion Card
them using the Pocket Tunes™ application
on your smartphone.
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
You can upgrade Pocket Tunes to a version
that supports more music file formats (such
as WMA), supports subscription music, and
includes additional features. For more info,
visit www.pocket-tunes.com/palm.
TIP
Pocket Tunes™
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Mac You need an
expansion card (sold separately) to listen to
music on your smartphone. You cannot
transfer MP3 files from your Mac directly
onto your smartphone.
You can listen to music through the
speaker on the back of your smartphone or
through the stereo headset included with
your smartphone. (If you want to use
stereo headphones with a 3.5mm
connector, then a 2.5mm stereo adapter is
required, sold separately). To listen to
music on your smartphone, you need to
convert the music files into MP3 format
using Windows Media Player (Windows
computers) or iTunes (Mac computers) and
then transfer the music files to your
smartphone or an expansion card. After
you transfer the music files, you can play
DID YOU KNOW? If a call comes in when you’re
listening to music, you can take the call and
the music pauses automatically. After you
finish the call, the music starts again.
Setting up Windows Media Player for
MP3
On a Windows computer, you need to set
Windows Media Player to save your music
files in MP3 format in order for the files to
be compatible with Pocket Tunes.
1 Connect your smartphone to your
computer with the sync cable.
2 On your smartphone, press
Applications
and select
pTunes
.
3 On your computer, open Windows
Media Player, and then click the
full-screen icon in the upper-right corner
to maximize the window.
POCKET TUNES™
123
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
4 Click Tools, and then click Options.
5 Click the Rip Music tab, click the
Format pick list, and then select mp3.
Click OK.
Uncheck
box
6 Click Tools, and then click Options.
7 Click the Devices tab, select Palm
Handheld from the Devices list, and
then click Properties.
9 Click OK, and then click OK again.
Select your
smartphone
Click
Properties
8 Click the Quality tab, uncheck the
Convert files as required by this
handheld (recommended) box, and
click Apply.
You now have set up Windows Media
Player to transfer MP3 files to the Pocket
Tunes application on your smartphone.
Setting up iTunes for MP3
On a Mac, use iTunes (included with OS X)
to convert music from a CD to MP3 format.
For more information on using the iTunes
software, see the documentation that
came with your Mac.
1 On your Mac, open iTunes.
2 Select Preferences.
3 Click the Advanced button at the top of
the window, and then click Importing.
124
POCKET TUNES™
4 Click the Import Using pop-up menu
and select MP3 Encoder.
1 Connect your smartphone to your
computer with the USB sync cable.
5 (Optional) Click the Setting pop-up
menu and select Good Quality.
2 On your smartphone, press
Applications
and select
pTunes
.
Mac If you want greater control over the
file size and sound quality of your MP3 files,
select Custom from the Setting pop-up
menu.
TIP
Transferring MP3 files from your computer
The Pocket Tunes software that comes
with your smartphone is compatible with
the popular MP3 audio file format. If your
MP3 files are already on your computer’s
hard drive, you need to transfer them to
your smartphone to listen to them on your
smartphone.
If an expansion card is inserted into the
smartphone, Windows Media Player
copies the MP3 files to the expansion card.
If you don’t have an expansion card
inserted, the MP3 files are copied to your
smartphone’s memory.
IMPORTANT You must synchronize your
smartphone with your computer at least
once before you can transfer MP3 files
from your computer.
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
3 If you are transferring MP3 files from a
Mac, insert an expansion card into your
smartphone. This step is optional for
Windows users.
4 Do one of the following:
WINDOWS ONLY Open Windows
Media Player on your computer. Select
the Sync tab, and then select Palm
Handheld from the drop-down list.
Select Start Sync. The files are
transferred to your smartphone.
NOTE Do not press the sync button on
your cable. Windows Media Player
transfers the files, so there’s no need to
do anything.
MAC ONLY Drag and drop the MP3
files onto the Send To Handheld
POCKET TUNES™
125
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
droplet in the Palm folder. Select your
device name, the file name, and the
destination (card). Click OK. Synchronize
your smartphone with your computer.
Be patient; transferring music to an
expansion card can take several
minutes.
DID YOU KNOW? You can also use a card reader
accessory (sold separately) to transfer MP3
files from your computer to your expansion
card. Create a Music_Audio folder in the root
directory of the card, and store your MP3 files
in this folder.
Transferring music from a CD to your
smartphone
If your songs are on a CD and you want to
listen to them on your smartphone, you
need to convert them to MP3 format on
your computer before you transfer the files
to your smartphone.
WINDOWS ONLY
1 On your computer, open Windows
Media Player.
2 Insert the music CD into your
computer’s CD drive.
126
POCKET TUNES™
3 Select the Rip tab.
4 Select the tracks you want to convert to
MP3.
5 Select Rip Music.
6 Transfer the MP3 files to your
smartphone as described in Transferring
MP3 files from your computer.
MAC ONLY
1 On your Mac, open iTunes.
2 Insert the music CD into the CD drive
on your Mac.
3 Check the boxes next to the tracks you
want to convert to MP3.
4 Click the Import button in the
upper-right corner of the iTunes window.
5 When the songs have finished
importing, click the Eject Disk button in
the lower-right corner of the iTunes
window.
6 Transfer the MP3 files to your
smartphone as described in Transferring
MP3 files from your computer.
Listening to music on your Treo
smartphone
•
To adjust the volume during playback,
press the Volume button on the side
of your smartphone.
•
To pause playback, select Pause
CAUTION Protect your hearing. Listening
to this device at full volume for a long
period of time can damage your hearing.
1 Make sure the Ringer switch is set to
Sound On
. See Silencing sounds
for more information.
2 Press Applications
pTunes
.
6
CHAPTER
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
.
DID YOU KNOW? You can also press Space to
pause and resume playback, as well as use
the 5-way to navigate among songs or pause
and resume playback.
and select
You can change the settings on your
smartphone so that pressing and holding the
Side button opens Pocket Tunes. See
Reassigning buttons for details.
TIP
3 Do any of the following:
•
To play or resume playback of the
current song, select Play
.
•
To play the next song, select Next
Song .
•
To play the previous song, select
Previous Song .
•
To play a different song, select
Choose Song
and select a
song from the list.
Progress
indicator
Play/Pause
Choose
Song
Previous
song
Next song
Volume
Pocket Tunes continues playing until it
reaches the end of your list or until you
select Pause
. Music continues to play
even if you switch to another application or
turn off your screen. If you want to stop
playing music when you exit Pocket Tunes,
press Menu
, select Background Prefs
from the Prefs menu, uncheck the Enable
background play box, and then select OK.
POCKET TUNES™
127
CHAPTER
6
YOUR PHOTOS, VIDEOS, AND MUSIC
Creating a playlist
Editing a playlist
If you want to play a group of songs in a
particular order, you can create a playlist.
1 Press Applications
pTunes
.
1 Press Applications
pTunes
.
2 Press Menu
and select
.
3 Select Actions, and then select
Manage Playlists.
4 Select New, and then enter a name for
the playlist.
5 Select Add Song. Select the songs you
want to include on the playlist.
2 Press Menu
and select
.
3 Select Actions, and then select
Manage Playlists.
4 Highlight a playlist, and then select Edit.
5 Do any of the following:
•
To delete a song from the playlist,
select the song and then select
Remove.
•
To add a song, select Add Song,
check a song’s box, and then
select Done.
•
To move a song up or down one slot,
select a song and then select Up or
Down.
6 Select Save List.
To delete a playlist, select Manage
Playlists from the Actions menu, select the
playlist, and then select Delete List. Select
Yes to confirm the deletion.
TIP
6 Select Save List.
To play songs from a playlist, open Pocket
Tunes, select Choose Songs, and then select
Playlists. Select the playlist you want to play,
and then select All.
TIP
128
POCKET TUNES™
C H A PT ER
7
Your personal information
organizer
Say good-bye to paper calendars and throw away those
scribbled to-do lists. Your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone is all
you need to organize your personal information and keep it with
you wherever you go.
You never lose your information, even if your battery is
completely drained. All of your personal info is backed up each
time you synchronize, and it is kept private when you use the
security features on your smartphone. Also, you can easily
share info with others electronically.
Benefits
•
Track current, future, and past
appointments
•
Make to-do lists that get done
•
Set reminders for appointments,
birthdays, important tasks, and
more
•
Before you call your friend in
London, check the time first
In this chapter
Contacts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
World Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Contacts
Contacts is where you enter information
about people you know. You can access
this info from the Phone application to dial
phone numbers and create favorites, and
from the Messaging and email applications
to send messages. When you create a
contact, you can also assign a photo and
ringtone ID to that contact, so you know
when they call you.
1 Press Phone
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
.
2 Select the Contacts favorite button.
You can also open Contacts from
Applications View. Press Applications and
select Contacts.
TIP
3 Select New Contact.
4 Use the 5-way
to move between
fields as you enter information.
DID YOU KNOW? If your company uses
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you
may be able to sync Contacts directly with the
server. See Working with Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync for info.
Adding a contact
5 (Optional) Do any of the following:
If you have several contacts to enter, it’s
more efficient to use the Palm® Desktop
software (included) or Microsoft Outlook®
(sold separately) on your computer and then
sync your smartphone with your computer.
For more info see Synchronizing information—
the basics.
TIP
Add a caller ID photo: Select the
Picture box, and then do one of the
following:
•
Select Camera to take a picture and
add it to this contact when you
save the picture.
CONTACTS
131
CHAPTER
7
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
•
Select Photos to add an existing
picture to this contact.
Add a caller ID ringtone: Select the
Ringtone pick list and select a ringtone
from the list to give incoming calls from
this contact a distinctive ring.
Place the entry in a category or mark
it private: Select Details. (See Working
with private entries for more info.)
Add a note to an entry: Select
Note
.
Display additional fields for this
contact: Select Plus
.
6 After you enter all the information,
select Done.
You can assign a ringtone to an entire
category of contacts. For example, use a
special ringtone for categories such as Family,
Work, or Golf Buddies. Select the category
pick list in the upper-right corner, select Edit
Categories, and then select the category.
Select the ringtone on the Edit Category
screen.
TIP
132
CONTACTS
Viewing or changing contact information
1 In the Contacts list, begin entering one
of the following for the contact you
want to view or edit:
•
First name (JOH for John)
•
Last name (SMI for Smith)
•
First initial and last name (JSM for
John Smith)
2 Select the name of the entry you want
to open.
3 Do one of the following:
•
Select Edit, make changes to the
entry as necessary, and then select
Done.
•
Select Map, wait for Google Maps to
locate matching items. Select an item,
select To to request directions to this
location. In the From location field,
enter or select your starting location,
and then select OK. When the route
summary appears, select OK to view
the first step in the directions. Tap the
forward
and back
buttons at the bottom of the screen to
view the next or previous step in the
directions.
•
Select Map, wait for Google Maps to
locate matching items. Select an item,
Select From to request directions
from this location. In the To location
field, enter or select your destination,
and then select OK. When the route
summary appears, select OK to view
the first step in the directions. Tap the
forward
and back
buttons at the bottom of the screen to
view the next or previous step in the
directions.
In the Contacts list, press Up or Down on
the 5-way to move to the previous or next
Contacts record.
3 Press Menu
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
.
4 Select Business Card from the Record
menu.
After you define your business card, you
can beam it to other Palm OS® devices. In any
Phone view or the Contacts application, open
the Record menu and select Beam Business
Card.
TIP
Calendar
TIP
Deleting a contact
1 Open the contact you want to delete.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Delete Contact from the Record
menu, and then select OK.
Defining your business card
Calendar is a powerful organizer application
that helps you manage your schedule. You
can view your calendar by day, week, or
month, or as an agenda list that combines
your Tasks list and email notifications with
your appointments. Schedule repeating
meetings or block out a vacation by
creating one event set to repeat at an
interval you specify. Color-code your
appointments by category and add notes
with helpful information.
1 Create a new contact and enter your
own business card info.
2 Open the contact entry containing your
business card info.
CALENDAR
133
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
CHAPTER
7
Week View: Shows your schedule for
an entire week. The time frames are
based on the Start Time and End Time
settings in Calendar Preferences.
? If your company uses
DID YOU KNOW
Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 or 2007, you
may be able to synchronize Calendar events
directly with the server. See Working with
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync for details.
Displaying your calendar
•
Month View: Shows your schedule for
a whole month.
•
From any Calendar view, open the
Options menu and select Year View to
view a calendar for an entire year.
•
From any Calendar view (except Agenda
View), use the 5-way
to go to
another day, week, month, or year
(based on the current view).
•
From any Calendar view (except Agenda
View), select Go To, and then select a
date from the calendar.
Press Calendar
repeatedly to cycle
through the various views:
Agenda View: Shows your daily
schedule, the number of unread email
messages, and any items on your Tasks
list that are overdue or due today. If
there’s room, Agenda View also lists
events on future dates.
Day View: Shows your daily schedule
one day at a time.
You can customize your smartphone to
display the most current Calendar event in the
Phone application’s Main View. Press Phone,
open the Options menu, and then select
Phone Display Options. Check the Show
Calendar event box.
TIP
134
CALENDAR
5 Select the End Time box and enter the
ending hour and minute for the event.
Creating an event
If you have several appointments to enter,
it’s more efficient to use Palm Desktop
software (included) or Microsoft Outlook (sold
separately) on your computer and then
synchronize your smartphone with your
computer. For more information, see
Synchronizing information—the basics.
TIP
1 Press Calendar
appears.
until Day View
2 Press Left or Right
desired day.
to select the
Selected
date
Selected
day
3 Select New.
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
6 (Optional) To assign a time zone to the
event, select the Time Zone pick list
and select a city in the time zone you
want.
7 Select OK.
8 Enter a description for the event.
IMPORTANT If you use Palm Desktop
software, do not add time zones to your
events. Palm Desktop does not support
time zones.
If you use Microsoft Outlook, you can use
the time zone feature, but you must install
the conduit from the Palm Software
Installation CD that came with your Treo
755P smartphone on all the computers with
which you sync your smartphone. Chapura
PocketMirror and other earlier Microsoft
Outlook conduits do not support time
zones.
4 Using the keyboard, enter a starting
hour and minute for the event, such as
545 for 5:45.
CALENDAR
135
CHAPTER
7
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
4 Select OK.
To automatically assign a time zone to
your events, open the Options menu, select
Preferences, and check the New events use
time zones box. All your new events will be
assigned to your local time zone (existing
events aren’t affected), and you can change
the time zone setting for individual events.
TIP
If you want your events with time zones to
stay at the same time in Calendar regardless
of the time zone you are in, go to Date & Time
Preferences, select the Automatically Set
pick list, and select Date and time. If you
select Date, time and time zone, the event
time shifts if you travel to a different time
zone. See Setting the date and time for
information.
Type of time
units
Number of
time units
TIP
Adding an alarm to an event
1 In Calendar, select the event.
2 Select Details.
3 Check the Alarm box and select the
number of minutes, hours, or days
before the event that you would like to
receive the alarm.
The alarm for untimed events is defined by
minutes, days, or hours before midnight of
the date of the event.
TIP
136
CALENDAR
DID YOU KNOW? When an alarm occurs, the
Alert screen displays all your pending alerts.
Select an alert description to jump to that
item, or check the box to clear that alert.
Creating an untimed event
An untimed event, such as a holiday or
deadline, does not occur at a particular
time.
1 Press Calendar
Day View.
until you are in
2 Press Left or Right
date of the event.
to go to the
3 Make sure no times are highlighted.
4 Enter a description for the event.
A diamond appears next to the
description of an untimed event.
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
select Other to define a custom
interval.
4 Select OK.
Scheduling a repeating event
To enter a birthday or anniversary, add this
info to the person’s Contacts entry and it
automatically appears in your Calendar.
TIP
This icon
indicates a
repeating
event.
To enter a holiday, create an untimed
event. Then, from the Details screen, select
Every year as the repeat interval.
TIP
1 Create an event, and then select it.
2 Select Details.
3 Select the Repeat pick list, and then
select a repeat interval. If the interval
you need doesn’t appear on the list,
DID YOU KNOW? If you sync with Microsoft
Outlook and your events include other people,
a With field appears in the Details dialog box
and your attendee info appears in this field
after you sync.
CALENDAR
137
CHAPTER
7
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
Color-coding your schedule
Editing or deleting an event
Use color-coding to quickly spot various
types of events. For example, make
appointments with family green,
coworkers blue, and friends red. Follow
these steps to create a category and
assign it a color-code.
1 Select the event you want to edit or
delete.
1 From Day View, select an event
description or select an empty timeslot.
3 In addition to the settings covered
earlier in this chapter, you can also
change any of the following settings:
2 Select Details.
Date and Time: Displays when the
event takes place. Change these
settings to reschedule the event.
3 Select the Category pick list and select
Edit Categories.
Location: Provides a description of
where the event takes place.
4 Do one of the following:
•
To create a new category, select New
and then enter a category name.
•
To add a color to an existing category,
select a category and select Edit.
5 Select the color you want to give this
category, and then select OK.
6 (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add
or edit more categories.
7 Select OK two more times.
Now that the categories are set up with
colors, you can assign categories to your
events to color-code them. See the next
section for details.
138
2 Select Details.
CALENDAR
Category: Sets the color-coded
category for this event.
Note
: Provides space for you to
enter additional text.
Delete: Removes the event from your
calendar.
4 Select OK.
To save memory, you can purge your old
events. Open the Record menu and select
Purge. Select the Delete events older than
pick list and select a time frame. Select OK.
TIP
Customizing display options for your
calendar
1 Press Menu
.
2 Select Options, and then select
Display Options.
3 Select the Default View pick list and
select the view you want to see when
you open Calendar.
the Background box, select the image
placeholder, and then select a photo.
Adjust the fade setting so that the text
is easy to read against the photo.
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
5 Select Day and set any of the following
Day View options:
4 Select Agenda and set any of the
following options:
Show Category List: The Category
pick list appears in Day View.
Show Due Tasks: The tasks that are
due today and the tasks that are
overdue appear in Agenda View.
Show Messages: The number of read
and unread email messages is displayed
in Agenda View.
Background: A favorite photo becomes
the Agenda View background. Check
Show Time Bars: The time bars appear
in Day View to show the duration of an
event and to illustrate event conflicts.
Compress Day View: When this box is
unchecked, all time slots appear on the
screen. When this box is checked, start
and end times appear for each event,
but blank time slots near the bottom of
the screen disappear to minimize
scrolling.
CALENDAR
139
CHAPTER
7
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
Show Category Column: The
color-coded category marker appears
between the time and the description to
indicate the category under which the
event is filed.
6 Select Month and set any of the
following Month View options:
7 Select OK.
Selecting alarm tones
1 Press Menu
.
2 Select Options, and then select Sound
Preferences.
3 Select the Application pick list and
select Calendar.
4 Select the Volume pick list and select
the volume level.
5 Select the Vibrate pick list and select an
option for how you want your
smartphone to vibrate for an event
alarm.
Show Category List: The Category pick
list appears in Month View.
Timed Events: The events that are
scheduled for a specific time appear in
Month View.
Untimed Events: The events that are
scheduled for a specific date but not a
specific time appear in Month View.
Daily Repeating Events: The events
that repeat every day appear in Month
View.
140
CALENDAR
6 Select tones from any of the following
pick lists:
Alarm Sound: The tone played the first
time your alarm goes off.
Reminder Sound: The tone played if an
alarm is not acknowledged and
the alarm repeats itself.
Repeat: The number of times the alarm
repeats itself if it is not acknowledged.
Default Alarm: The default time frame
for the alarm field.
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
World Clock
World Clock displays the day and time in
three cities anywhere around the globe.
Whether you’re traveling or staying home,
it’s easy to keep track of the best time to
reach your business associates, friends,
and family in faraway places.
If you did not select the option to get the
date and time from the mobile network, you
can set the city at the top of the screen to a
fixed location.
TIP
7 Select Done.
You can also record sounds and use them
as alarms. Select Manage on the Sound &
Alerts Preferences screen.
TIP
To record a sound, select New.
• To play a sound, select it and press Center
on the 5-way.
• To delete a sound, select it and press
Backspace.
• To send a sound, select it and then select
Send.
DID YOU KNOW? Your smartphone includes a
silent alarm that can vibrate even when the
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off (see
Silencing sounds).
•
Selecting cities
World Clock shows the system date and
time above the world map. If you selected
the option to get the date and time from
the mobile network (see Setting the date
and time), your wireless service provider
network automatically updates the time
display to match the local time when
you travel.
Below the world map you can view the
time in two other cities. If you travel a lot,
you may want to select your home city as
WORLD CLOCK
141
CHAPTER
7
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
one of these two cities, so that you always
know what time it is at home.
1 Press Applications
World Clock
.
and select
2 Select a City pick list, and select a city
in the same time zone as the city you
want to track.
2 Select Add.
3 Select a location in the same time zone
as the city you want to add, and then
select OK.
4 Enter the name of the city.
5 Select Location, select Map, select the
location of the city, and then select OK.
6 If the city does not observe daylight
saving time, uncheck this box. If daylight
saving time is observed, enter Start
and End dates.
7 Select OK.
Setting an alarm
DID YOU KNOW? You can run your stylus over
the map to see the time in other cities. The
shadow over the map represents nighttime
moving across the globe.
The next time you travel, don’t rely on a
hotel alarm clock to get you to that
important meeting. Use your smartphone
instead. World Clock includes a built-in
alarm feature that you can use as a travel
alarm.
1 Select Off in the upper-right corner.
Adding cities
If the city you want to display is not in the
predefined list, you can add it.
1 Select a City pick list and select Edit
List.
142
WORLD CLOCK
2 Select the time you want the alarm to
sound.
3 Select OK.
To customize the alarm sound and
volume, open the Options menu and select
Alarm Preferences.
TIP
Make sure the Ringer switch is set to
Sound On, so that you can hear the alarm.
TIP
Tasks
You can use Tasks to remind you of tasks
you need to complete and to keep a record
of when you finish tasks.
Adding a task
1 Press Applications
Tasks
.
and select
3 Enter a description of the task. The text
can be longer than one line.
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
Setting task priority, due date, and other
details
The Details dialog box enables you to
assign a priority level, due date, category,
privacy flag, and other details for each task.
1 Select the task to which you want to
assign details.
2 Select Details.
3 Set any of the following:
Priority: Select the priority number for
this task (1 is the most important). Later
you can arrange your tasks based on the
importance of each task.
2 Select New to create a new task.
You can also select the priority from the
Tasks list by selecting the number next to a
task and then selecting a priority level.
TIP
TASKS
143
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
CHAPTER
7
Private: Check this box to mark this
task private. See Working with private
entries for additional information.
: Select this button to enter
additional text that you want to
associate with the task.
4 Select OK.
Category: Assign the task to a specific
category. To add a new category, select
Edit Categories and then select New.
Due Date: Select the Due Date pick list
and select a due date for the task.
Press Menu to access other features such
as importing phone numbers into the Tasks
list.
TIP
Checking off a task
1 Select the task you want to check off.
If you turn on the Show Due Dates option
in the Tasks Preferences screen, you can
change the due date later by selecting the
task’s due date in the Tasks list.
TIP
Alarm: Set an alarm for this task.
Repeat: Indicate whether the task
occurs at regular intervals and how
often it repeats. When you check off a
repeating task, the next instance of this
task automatically appears in your task
list.
144
TASKS
2 Press Center
or tap the box to
check off the task.
•
Date: Displays tasks that are due in a
specific time frame. Select the Date
pick list (in the title bar) to select Due
Today, Last 7 Days, Next 7 Days, or
Past Due.
•
Category: Displays tasks that are
assigned to the selected category.
Select the Category pick list to select a
different category.
If you accidentally check off a task and
need to uncheck it, highlight the task again
and press Center on the 5-way to uncheck it.
TIP
You can set Tasks to record the date that
you completed a task, and you can select to
show or hide completed tasks. Completed
tasks remain in the memory of your
smartphone until you purge them.
TIP
7
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
DID YOU KNOW? Overdue tasks have an
exclamation point (!) next to the due date.
Organizing your tasks
In the Tasks list, select one of these
options:
•
All: Displays all your tasks.
TASKS
145
CHAPTER
7
YOUR PERSONAL INFORMATION ORGANIZER
3 Set any of the following preferences:
Deleting a task
1 Select the task you want to delete.
2 Press Menu
.
Sort by: Indicates the order in which
your tasks appear in the list.
3 Select Delete Task from the Record
menu.
Show Completed Tasks: Displays
tasks you’ve checked off.
4 Select OK.
Record Completion Date: Replaces
due date with the completion date
when you complete (check off) the task.
To save memory, you can purge all
completed tasks. Open the Record menu and
select Purge. Select OK.
TIP
Customizing Tasks
Show Due Dates: Displays task due
dates and inserts an exclamation point
(!) next to overdue tasks.
Tasks Preferences enable you to control
the appearance of the Tasks list.
Show Priorities: Displays the priority
setting for each task.
1 In the Tasks list, press Menu
Show Categories: Displays the
category for each task.
.
Alarm Sound: Sets the sound for the
alarms you assign to your tasks.
4 Select OK.
DID YOU KNOW? You can display your tasks in
your calendar. See Customizing display
options for your calendar for details.
2 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
146
TASKS
C H A PT ER
8
Your memos and documents
With its ability to store large amounts of important information,
your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone lets you take your office
with you—including your Microsoft® Office and PDF files. You
can keep updated copies of the files on both your smartphone
and your computer so that you can work on them in the most
convenient location any time.
Leave your note pad and voice recorder at home. Use Memos
to type notes. Use Voice Memo to record notes, agenda items,
and other important thoughts, and play them back, right on
your smartphone. You can even send your notes and voice
memos to a friend or colleague by attaching them to an email
message.
Benefits
•
Manage Word, Excel®,
PowerPoint®, and PDF files on your
smartphone
•
Improve productivity by taking
important docs, spreadsheets, and
presentations with you
•
Capture thoughts on the fly
In this chapter
Documents To Go® Professional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Memos. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Voice Memo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Documents To Go®
Professional
Here are a few more examples of what you
can do with Documents:
•
Send and receive email attachments in
Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and Acrobat
file formats (DOC, XLS, PPT, and PDF).
•
View Word, Excel, PowerPoint, and
Adobe® Acrobat® files (DOC, XLS, PPT,
and PDF).
•
Create or edit a Word-compatible
document or Excel-compatible
spreadsheet on your smartphone, and
then save it in the native DOC or XLS
format.
•
Create a PowerPoint presentation on
your computer, use the Documents To
Go desktop application to optimize the
file for your smartphone, and then sync
the file onto your smartphone. View or
edit the file on your smartphone, and
then sync again to transfer the changes
to the original PowerPoint file on your
computer.
NOTE On your smartphone, the
companion application for Documents To
Go® is named Documents.
With the Documents application on your
smartphone, you can take your important
office info with you. You can create, view,
and edit Microsoft Word and Excel files
directly on your smartphone. You can also
view and manage PowerPoint and PDF
files. For example, you can open email
attachments, files you download with the
web browser, and files stored on an
expansion card (sold separately)—as long
as the files are in a supported format.
NOTE The version of Documents To Go
that comes with your smartphone does not
support Microsoft Office 2007. To access
Office 2007 files on your smartphone, you
must save the files in Office 2003 format.
For information about an upgrade that
supports Office 2007, go to
www.dataviz.com/office2007 (additional
fees may apply).
8
CHAPTER
YOUR MEMOS AND DOCUMENTS
NOTE The Documents application does
not support some editing functions, such
as multiple font sizes and spell checking.
DOCUMENTS TO GO® PROFESSIONAL
149
CHAPTER
8
YOUR MEMOS AND DOCUMENTS
Go to http://go.palm.com/treo755p/ to
download and install the Documents To Go
desktop software. It enables you to
synchronize Microsoft Office files so that
changes you make to these files show up
on both your smartphone and your
computer. You can save files in their native
Office format or make use of the optimized
Documents To Go formats.
Opening a document
In the Documents application, you can
view and open any Word, Excel,
PowerPoint, or Acrobat (PDF) file on your
smartphone or on an expansion card that is
inserted into the expansion card slot.
1 Press Applications
Documents
.
and select
For more info on the Documents To Go
desktop application, click the Documents To
Go icon on your computer, and then click
Help, or go to www.dataviz.com.
TIP
Download and install the Files application
to easily browse and manage files on an
expansion card. Press Applications, select
My Treo, select the Bonus tab, and then
select Files. See Installing bonus software
from My Treo on your smartphone for more
info on installing applications.
TIP
2 Select the document you want from the
list.
When you work on a file on your
smartphone, you can save it to your
smartphone or to an expansion card. Open
the File menu, select Save As, and then
select the location where you want to save
the file.
TIP
150
DOCUMENTS TO GO® PROFESSIONAL
Memos
You can assign categories to your memos.
Open the memo you want to change, select
the category pick list at the top of the screen,
and select a category. To add a new category,
select Edit Categories and then select New.
TIP
Memos are a great way to store notes on
your Treo 755P smartphone.
DID YOU KNOW? Each memo can include 4,096
characters of text.
Deleting a memo
1 Open the memo you want to delete.
Creating a memo
2 Press Menu
1 Press Applications
Memos
.
3 Select Delete Memo from the Record
menu.
and select
8
CHAPTER
YOUR MEMOS AND DOCUMENTS
.
2 Enter the text you want to appear in the
memo.
4 Select OK.
3 Select Done.
Voice Memo
Voice Memo provides a place for you to
record and play back notes and other
important thoughts directly on your
smartphone.
NOTE Voice memos are not updated or
backed up during synchronization.
MEMOS
151
CHAPTER
8
YOUR MEMOS AND DOCUMENTS
Creating a voice memo
Listening to a voice memo
When recording a voice memo, face your
smartphone’s screen while speaking.
1 Press Applications
Voice Memo
.
1 Press and hold the Side button on your
smartphone while recording your
memo. After you finish recording,
release the Side button.
2 In the Voice Memo list, navigate to the
voice memo title and then press
Center
to select it. The voice
memo begins to play.
and select
The memo is automatically saved to
your smartphone.
2 (Optional) Enter a title for the voice
memo.
You can also access Voice Memo by
pressing Applications and selecting Voice
Memo.
TIP
If you need to pause while recording,
press and hold Center on the 5-way. Release
the button to resume recording.
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? Your recording pauses
automatically when you receive a call. If you
ignore the call, you can press Center on the
5-way to resume recording. If you answer the
call, recording stops and saves your voice
memo. You cannot resume a previous
recording; you must start another voice
memo.
152
VOICE MEMO
3 Press Center
playback.
to pause or stop
8
CHAPTER
YOUR MEMOS AND DOCUMENTS
To adjust the volume level, press the
Volume button on the side of your
smartphone.
TIP
To change a voice memo title, open the
Voice Memo menu and select Rename
Memo.
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? You can send a voice memo in
an email (see the documentation for your
email application). You can also use
Bluetooth® wireless technology to send a
voice memo to a nearby Bluetooth device
(see Sending info over a Bluetooth wireless
connection).
VOICE MEMO
153
YOUR MEMOS AND DOCUMENTS
CHAPTER
8
154
VOICE MEMO
C H A PT ER
9
Your application and
info management tools
Synchronization is a great way to transfer, update, and back up
info on your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone. Synchronizing
simply means that info you entered or updated in one place
(your smartphone or your computer) is automatically updated in
the other. There’s no need to enter info twice.
Expansion cards (sold separately) provide a compact and
limitless storage solution. When one card becomes full, simply
use another card to carry your extra music and video clips and
to install and run cool games and other software, from
dictionaries to travel guides.
Benefits
•
Locate info in your applications
with the Find feature
•
Install applications, games, and
other software
•
Quickly enter, update, and protect
your info on your computer and
your smartphone
•
Store, carry, and exchange info
In this chapter
Using Find . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Viewing and using the alerts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Calculator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Installing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Removing applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Viewing application info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Sending information with Bluetooth® wireless technology . . . . . . . 164
Beaming information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Synchronizing information—advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Using expansion cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Using Find
4 In the search results, select the text you
want to review, or select Find More to
continue the search.
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
The Find feature locates any text in the
built-in applications and databases and
in some third-party applications. The Find
feature searches for the group of
characters you specify, including characters
that are part of a word. Find is not
case-sensitive.
Find also includes Google Maps links that
help you find a location, business, or
directions to the word you’re searching for.
For example, to find a nearby pizza place,
enter pizza followed by a space and your
zip code, such as “pizza 95060.”
DID YOU KNOW? Find locates any word that
begins with the text you enter. For example,
entering “plan” finds “planet,” but not
“airplane.”
1 Press Option
, and then press Shift/
Find
to open the Find dialog box.
2 Enter the text you want to find.
3 Select OK to start the search.
Viewing and using
the alerts
The Alert screen on your smartphone
shows info about incoming items such as
new email messages and Calendar events.
The Alert screen also notifies you if you
miss a phone call.
To view the Alert screen, tap the blinking
bell
when it appears in the upper-left
corner of any screen, or press and hold
Center
when the blinking bell appears.
USING FIND
157
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
You can do any of the following:
2 Press Menu
.
•
Check the box to clear an alert from the
list.
3 Select Options, and then select
Advanced Mode or Basic Mode.
•
Select the alert to open the
corresponding application and view the
alert item (message, event, missed call,
and so on).
Basic
Mode
•
Select Done to close the Alert screen
and return to whatever you were doing
on your smartphone before you opened
the Alert screen. The bell continues to
blink in the upper-left corner of the
screen.
•
Select Clear All to delete all alerts on
the Alert screen.
Advanced
Mode—Math
Calculator
Calculator includes a basic calculator, plus
an advanced calculator with scientific,
financial, and conversion functions.
Switching between Basic and Advanced
Calculator Modes
1 Press Applications
Calc
.
158
CALCULATOR
and select
TIP In Basic Mode, you can also press Right
on the 5-way to switch to Advanced Mode.
In Advanced Mode, press Right on the 5-way
to cycle between functions, and press Left on
the 5-way to return to Basic Mode.
DID YOU KNOW? You can tap the onscreen
number pad or use the keyboard to input
numbers.
Selecting functions in Advanced
Calculator Mode
Length: Length conversions for metric
and English values.
1 Switch to Advanced Mode (see the
preceding procedure).
Area: Area conversions for metric,
traditional, and English values.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Options, and then select the
type of function you want to use:
Math: Advanced mathematical
functions such as exponents, roots, and
logarithms.
Volume: Volume conversions for metric
and English values.
4 Press Menu
.
5 Select Pref, and then select the decimal
display format: Float, Fixed(x), Sci(x),
or Eng(x).
Trig: Trigonometric functions such as
sine, cosine, tangent, and variants.
6 Press Menu
Finance: Financial calculator functions
such as APR and amortization.
7 Select Pref, and then select the number
display format: Degrees, Radians, or
Grads.
Logic: Hexadecimal characters in
keypad, plus logic functions such as
And, Not, Or, and Xor.
Statistics: Statistical functions such as
sum, factorial, and random number
generator.
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
.
Select Sto to store a number in one of ten
memory slots. Select Rcl to recall a stored
number.
TIP
Select Con to access a list of
mathematical constants such as Avogadro’s
number or the speed of light.
TIP
Weight/Tmp: Weight and temperature
conversions for metric and English
values.
CALCULATOR
159
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
Installing applications
Your smartphone comes with several
built-in and ready-to-use applications. You
can also install free bonus software, such
as business software, games, and more.
You can install the bonus software
wirelessly using the My Treo application on
your smartphone. You can also download
the bonus software from http://
go.palm.com/treo755p/ to your computer
and then synchronize to install it on your
smartphone. You can use the web browser
on your smartphone or your computer to
purchase other third-party Palm OS® apps.
To learn about applications you can
purchase for your smartphone, go to http://
go.palm.com/treo755p/.
NOTE The instructions in this section tell
you how to install basic PRC (Palm OS
application) and PDB (Palm OS database)
files on your Treo smartphone. Some Palm
OS software uses an installer or wizard to
guide you through the process. For details,
consult the documentation that came with
the software.
160
INSTALLING APPLICATIONS
Installing bonus software from My Treo
on your smartphone
My Treo lets you download and install
software that you can use on your
smartphone. If the software has both a
desktop component in addition to a
smartphone component, you need to
download the software to your computer
first. See Installing bonus software from
My Palm on your computer for info on
installing software that includes a desktop
component.
1 Press Applications
My Treo
.
and select
2 Select the Bonus tab.
3 Select the Install link below the name
of the application you want to install.
4 Repeat step 3 to install additional
applications.
Installing applications from the Internet
You can use the web browser on your
smartphone to install Palm OS files (PRC or
PDB) directly from the Internet. When you
download a PRC or PDB file, it is
automatically installed on your
smartphone. If a file is compressed (ZIP or
SIT files), you need to download it to your
computer and expand the file before
installing it on your smartphone.
Installing other third-party applications
from a computer
1 Open the web browser (see Viewing a
web page).
from your computer to your Treo
smartphone, you must first install
Palm® Desktop software on your computer
(see Installing the desktop synchronization
software).
2 Go to the page that contains the link to
the application you want to download.
3 Press Left or Right to highlight the
link to the file, and then press
Center
to initiate the download
process.
4 Follow the onscreen instructions to
accept and install the application.
Installing bonus software from My Palm
on your computer
1 On your computer, go to http://
go.palm.com/treo755p/.
2 Follow the onscreen instructions to
download the application(s) you want to
install.
3 When prompted to select either Save or
Run, select Run to place the app(s) in
the install queue.
4 Synchronize your smartphone with your
computer to install the application(s) on
your smartphone.
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
BEFORE YOU BEGIN To install an app
When you download an application to your
computer, it is probably in a compressed
format such as a ZIP or SIT file. If the file is
compressed, you need to use a
decompression utility on your computer,
such as WinZip or Allume Stuffit Expander,
before you install the application on your
smartphone.
1 Windows: Drag and drop
the file(s) onto the Palm
Quick Install icon on the
Windows desktop.
Mac: Drag and drop the file(s) onto the
Send To Device droplet in the Palm
folder.
2 Select your device name from the User
list, and then click OK.
INSTALLING APPLICATIONS
161
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
3 Synchronize your smartphone with your
computer to install the application(s) on
your Treo smartphone.
You can open a window to select whether
to install files on your smartphone or on an
expansion card.
Removing
applications
TIP
Windows: Double-click the Palm Quick
Install icon.
Mac: Open the HotSync menu and select
Install Handheld files.
On a Windows computer, you can also
access Palm Quick Install by selecting the
Quick Install icon in Palm® Desktop software
or from the Programs folder in the Start
menu.
TIP
Getting help with third-party applications
If you encounter a problem with a
third-party application (such as an error
message), contact the application’s author
or vendor. For general troubleshooting of
third-party applications, see Third-party
applications.
If you decide that you no longer need an
application, or you want to free up
memory, you can remove apps from your
smartphone or an expansion card (for more
on expansion cards, see Using expansion
cards). You can remove only apps, patches,
and extensions that you install; you cannot
remove the built-in apps that reside in the
ROM portion of your Treo smartphone.
DID YOU KNOW? Some applications are
factory-installed on your smartphone and
cannot be deleted. These are listed with a
Lock icon next to them.
DID YOU KNOW? Applications deleted from your
smartphone are kept on your computer in the
Archive folder of your user folder. If you’re
having trouble locating your user folder, see
I can’t find my user folder.
1 Press Applications
.
2 If you want to remove an application
from an expansion card, insert the card
into your smartphone.
162
REMOVING APPLICATIONS
3 Press Menu
.
4 Select Delete on the App menu.
5 Select the Delete From pick list and
select the location of the application you
want to remove: Phone or Card.
6 Select the application that you want to
remove.
If you upgraded from a previous version
of Palm Desktop software, your Backup
subfolder may be located in the
palmOne or Handspring folder.
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
2 If you find a PRC or PDB file for the
application you just removed, delete the
file from the Backup subfolder.
7 Select Delete, and then select Yes to
confirm the deletion.
3 Delete the file from your device again.
8 Synchronize to remove the application
from the Backup folder on your
computer.
Viewing application
info
Manually deleting applications
If an app you delete reappears on your
smartphone, you may need to manually
delete the app from your computer.
The Info screens display basic statistics
about the applications on your Treo
smartphone.
1 Locate your Backup subfolder on your
computer.
1 Press Applications
Windows: C:\Program
Files\Palm\<device name>.
Mac: Mac
HD\Applications\Palm\Users\<device
name>.
2 Press Menu
.
.
3 Select Info on the App menu.
4 Select the Device pick list and select the
location of the app you want to view
info for: Phone or <card name>.
VIEWING APPLICATION INFO
163
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
CHAPTER
9
Sending information
with Bluetooth®
wireless technology
Version: The version numbers of
applications on your smartphone.
Size: The size (in kilobytes) of
applications and information on your
smartphone.
Records: The number of entries in
various applications on your
smartphone.
5 Scroll to the application you want to see
info about.
6 Select Done.
The range of Bluetooth® wireless
technology is up to 30 feet/10 meters in
optimum environmental conditions.
Performance and range may be affected by
physical obstacles, radio interference from
nearby electronic equipment, and other
factors.
Sending info over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
In most applications you can send an
individual entry or item such as a contact or
a picture. You can also send all the entries
in a category, such as all contacts in the
Business category.
1 Press Applications
Bluetooth
.
2 Select Bluetooth On.
3 Open an application.
164
SENDING INFORMATION WITH BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY
and select
4 Select the entry or category you want to
send. You cannot send an item that has
a lock
next to it.
7 Select the application you want to
transfer. You cannot send an item that
has a lock
next to it.
5 Press Menu
8 Select Send.
.
6 Select Send from the leftmost menu.
9 Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
7 Select Bluetooth, and then select OK.
10 Select the receiving device(s) on the
Discovery Results screen, and then
select OK.
8 Select the receiving device(s) in the
Discovery Results list, and then select
OK.
9 Wait for a message to indicate that the
transfer is complete before you
continue using your smartphone.
Sending an app over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
1 Press Applications
Bluetooth
.
and select
4 Press Menu
11 Wait for a message to indicate that the
transfer is complete before you
continue using your smartphone.
Receiving info over a Bluetooth wireless
connection
1 Press Applications
Bluetooth
.
and select
2 Select Bluetooth On.
2 Select Bluetooth On.
3 Press Applications
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
.
.
5 Select Send from the App menu.
6 Select the Send From pick list and
select the location of the app you want
to send: Phone or <card name>.
3 Select the Visibility pick list and select
one of the following:
Visible: Enables Bluetooth devices that
are not on your Trusted Device list to
request a connection with your
smartphone. Your smartphone remains
accessible to other devices until you
turn this option off. After you’ve finished
using this setting, remember to change
it back to Hidden.
SENDING INFORMATION WITH BLUETOOTH® WIRELESS TECHNOLOGY
165
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
Temporary: Enables Bluetooth devices
that are not on your Trusted Device list
to request a connection with your
smartphone during the next two
minutes. Your smartphone reverts to
the Hidden setting and becomes
inaccessible to other devices after two
minutes.
4 Use the other device to discover your
smartphone and send information to it:
•
•
See the other device’s documentation
to learn how to discover and send
information over a Bluetooth wireless
connection.
If the Ringer switch is set to Sound
On
, your smartphone beeps to
notify you of the connection, and then
prompts you to accept the info. Select
a category or expansion card to
specify where you want to store the
item. If you don’t select a category,
the item goes into the Unfiled
category.
5 Select Yes to receive the information or
No to refuse it.
166
BEAMING INFORMATION
The Device Name in the Bluetooth app is
the name other devices with Bluetooth
wireless technology see when they connect
to your smartphone. The default name is the
name you gave your device during setup. You
can change this name if you want to.
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? When you receive an
application over a Bluetooth connection, you
can store the application on your smartphone
or send it to an expansion card inserted into
the expansion card slot.
Beaming information
Your Treo 755P smartphone is equipped
with an IR (infrared) port so that you can
beam information to another Palm OS®
device with an IR port. The IR port is
located on the side of your smartphone,
above the expansion card slot door, behind
the small dark shield.
For best results, the path between the
two devices must be clear of obstacles, and
both devices must be stationary. If you have
difficulty beaming, shorten the distance and
avoid bright sunlight.
TIP
Beaming an entry
You can beam an individual entry or item
such as a contact or a picture. You can also
beam all the entries in the selected
category, such as all the contacts in the
Business or Family category.
smartphone directly at the IR port on
the receiving device.
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
5 Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to
indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue using your
smartphone.
Beam your business card in two key
presses: From the Phone application’s Main
View, press Menu, and then press the M key.
TIP
1 Select the entry or category you want to
beam. You cannot beam an item that
has a lock
next to it.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Record, and then select one of
the following:
Beam: Sends an individual entry.
Beam Category: Sends all entries in
the current category.
? If you beam a bookmark or
DID YOU KNOW
saved page from the web browser, it beams
the URL, not the contents of that page.
4 When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, point the IR port on your
Beaming an application
Not all applications can be beamed. A lock
icon
appears on the Beam screen next
to applications that cannot be beamed.
1 Press Applications
2 Press Menu
.
.
3 Select Beam from the App menu.
4 Select the Beam From pick list, and
select whether the application you want
to beam is located on your Treo
smartphone or on an expansion card.
BEAMING INFORMATION
167
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
5 Select the application you want to
transfer.
6 Select Beam.
7 When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, point the IR port on your
smartphone directly at the IR port on
the receiving device.
8 Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to
indicate that the transfer is complete
before you continue using your
smartphone.
Receiving beamed information
If you do not select a category upon
receiving a beamed item, the item is placed in
the Unfiled category.
TIP
If you can’t receive beamed information,
make sure the Beam Receive option is turned
on (see Optimizing power settings) and that
you are not running a third-party application
that disables beaming. If you still can’t receive
a beam, try a soft reset (see Resetting your
smartphone).
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? You can store a beamed
application on your smartphone, or send it to
an expansion card inserted into the expansion
card slot.
1 Turn on your screen.
2 Select the beam command on the
transmitting device.
3 Point the IR port on your smartphone
directly at the IR port on the
transmitting device to open the Beam
Status dialog box.
Synchronizing
information—
advanced
4 When the Beam Status dialog box
appears, select a category for the entry.
Changing which applications sync
5 Select Yes to receive the information or
No to refuse it.
168
SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION—ADVANCED
By default, information from Calendar,
Contacts, Memos, Pics&Videos, and Tasks
is updated each time you synchronize your
smartphone with Palm Desktop software
(included) or Microsoft Outlook (sold
separately). You can change which
applications synchronize. For example, if
you don’t use the Memos application and
you want to speed up synchronization, you
can turn off synchronization for Memos.
Select Do nothing to turn off
synchronization for an app that currently
synchronizes (for example, to turn off
synchronization for Memos if you do not
use this app).
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
TIP Windows
If you set up your
smartphone to sync with Outlook, you can
learn how to change which applications
synchronize, by doing the following: Click the
HotSync® manager icon in the taskbar and
select Custom. Select a conduit that syncs
with Outlook, click Change, and then click
Help.
WINDOWS ONLY
1 Click HotSync manager
in the
taskbar in the lower-right corner of your
screen.
2 Select Custom.
3 Select your device name from the User
list at the top of the screen.
4 Select the application for which you
want to turn synchronization on or off,
and then click Change.
5 Select Synchronize the files to turn on
synchronization for an app.
NOTE Select one of the two overwrite
options if you want the information in one
location (smartphone or computer) to
completely replace the information in the
other location for that app. For example, if
the Calendar info on your smartphone is
accurate but the info on your computer has
become corrupted, select Handheld
overwrites Desktop for the Calendar app
to have your smartphone info replace your
computer info. Note that “handheld” refers
to your smartphone and “desktop” refers
to your computer.
SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION—ADVANCED
169
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
6 (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for
each application for which you want to
turn synchronization on or off.
synchronization for Memos if you do not
use this app).
7 Click OK, and then click Done.
TIP Windows To keep the current sync
setting on an ongoing basis, check the Set as
default box. If you do not check this box, the
option you select applies only the next time
you synchronize. Thereafter, info is updated
according to the default setting.
NOTE Select one of the two overwrite
MAC ONLY
1 Double-click the Palm Desktop
in the Palm folder.
icon
2 From the HotSync menu, select
Conduit Settings.
3 From the User pop-up menu, select
your device name.
4 Select the application for which you
want to turn synchronization on or off,
and then click Conduit Settings.
5 Select Synchronize the files to turn on
synchronization for an app.
Select Do nothing to turn off
synchronization for an app that currently
synchronizes (for example, to turn off
170
SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION—ADVANCED
options if you want the information in one
location (smartphone or computer) to
completely replace the information in the
other location for that app. For example, if
the Calendar info on your smartphone is
accurate but the info on your computer has
become corrupted, select Handheld
overwrites Macintosh for the Calendar
app to have your smartphone info replace
your computer info. Note that “handheld”
refers to your smartphone.
6 (Optional) Repeat steps 4 and 5 for
each application for which you want to
turn synchronization on or off.
7 Click OK, and then close the Conduit
Settings window.
Mac To keep the current setting on an
ongoing basis, select Make Default. If you do
not select this button, the option you select
applies only the next time you synchronize.
Thereafter, info is updated according to the
default setting.
TIP
3 Enter a device name for your
smartphone. This is the name that
appears on the other Bluetooth device’s
screen when it connects to your
smartphone.
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
4 Select the Visibility pick list and select
Visible or Temporary.
After you form a partnership with a device,
you can change the Visibility setting to
Hidden. That way only devices with which
you’ve already formed a partnership can find
your smartphone. New devices cannot
request a connection.
TIP
Setting up a Bluetooth connection for
synchronization
If your computer is enabled with Bluetooth
wireless technology, you can synchronize
wirelessly over a Bluetooth connection.
1 Press Applications
Bluetooth
.
and select
5 Select Setup Devices.
6 Select HotSync Setup.
2 Select Bluetooth On.
SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION—ADVANCED
171
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
7 Follow the onscreen instructions to
create a partnership between your
smartphone and your computer.
In some cases you may need to
perform setup steps on your computer
before you can complete this step.
Check your computer’s documentation
for specific setup instructions.
1 Press Applications
HotSync
.
and select
8 After you finish the HotSync Setup,
select Done to return to Applications
View.
You’re now ready to sync your smartphone
with your Bluetooth computer.
Synchronizing over a Bluetooth
connection
When you synchronize using your
smartphone’s Bluetooth wireless feature,
you don’t need your sync cable. This is
especially useful if you travel with a laptop
enabled with Bluetooth wireless
technology.
172
SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION—ADVANCED
2 Select Local.
3 Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon, and then select the name of the
PC you set up for Bluetooth
synchronization (see Setting up a
Bluetooth connection for
synchronization).
4 Select the HotSync
smartphone.
icon on your
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your
smartphone screen. Be patient;
synchronization may take a few minutes.
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
Synchronizing over an infrared
connection
BEFORE YOU BEGIN Check the following
on your computer:
•
It must have an enabled IR port and
driver or have an IR device attached to
it. Check your computer’s
documentation to see if it supports IR
communication.
•
HotSync manager must be active. On a
Windows computer, you know HotSync
manager is active when its icon appears
in the lower-right corner of your screen.
When you synchronize using your
smartphone’s IR port, you don’t need a
cable. This is especially useful if you travel
with an IR-enabled laptop.
WINDOWS ONLY
1 On your computer, click HotSync
manager
in the taskbar in the
lower-right corner of your screen. Make
sure that Infrared is selected.
2 On your smartphone, press
Applications
and select
HotSync
.
3 Select Local.
4 Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.
5 Position the IR port on your smartphone
within a few inches of the IR port on
your computer.
6 Select the HotSync
smartphone.
icon on your
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your
smartphone screen. Be patient;
synchronization may take a few minutes.
SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION—ADVANCED
173
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
MAC ONLY
1 Double-click HotSync manager
the Palm folder.
in
2 Click the HotSync Controls tab, and
then select Enabled.
3 Click the Connection Settings tab, and
then check the On box next to IR port.
4 Close the HotSync Software Setup
window.
5 On your smartphone, press
Applications
and select
HotSync
.
6 Select Local.
7 Select the pick list below the HotSync
icon and select IR to a PC/Handheld.
8 Position the IR port on your smartphone
within a few inches of the IR port on
your computer.
9 Select the HotSync
smartphone.
icon on your
When synchronization is complete, a
message appears at the top of your
smartphone screen. Be patient;
synchronization may take a few minutes.
174
SYNCHRONIZING INFORMATION—ADVANCED
Synchronizing using Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync®
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync® works
with the VersaMail® application, Calendar,
and Contacts applications on your
smartphone to directly access corporate
groupware information in Microsoft
Exchange Server 2003 or 2007. If your
company uses Microsoft Exchange Server
2003 or 2007, you may be able to
wirelessly synchronize info in these
applications on the server from your
smartphone without using a desktop
computer.
A Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account
interacts with your desktop software as
follows:
•
Microsoft Outlook (sold separately):
Info in Calendar, Contacts, and the
VersaMail application on your
smartphone is pushed from or syncs
with the server; it does not sync directly
with Outlook on your desktop. However,
if the server pushes info to or syncs
with Outlook on your desktop, any info
you enter in these applications on your
smartphone also appears in Outlook
after the next server push or sync.
NOTE Push is a feature provided by
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync that
pushes email messages, Calendar events,
meeting invitations, and updated contact
information it receives onto your
smartphone.
•
Palm Desktop software: Info in
Calendar, Contacts, and the VersaMail
application does not sync with and does
not appear in Palm Desktop software on
your computer.
NOTE Info in other apps, such as Tasks
and Memos, continues to sync with and
appear in the desktop software on your
computer (Outlook or Palm Desktop
software).
For complete information on using a
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account,
see the User Guide for the VersaMail®
Application at
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.
Using expansion
cards
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
The expansion card slot on your Treo
smartphone enables you to add miniSD
cards (sold separately) to extend the
storage capacity of your smartphone. For
example, expansion cards can store the
following:
•
Photos
•
MP3 audio files
•
Email attachments
•
Games
•
eBooks
•
Microsoft Office files
•
Adobe Acrobat files
•
Applications
•
Databases
Inserting an expansion card
The expansion card slot on your
smartphone has a push-push mechanism:
push in gently to insert a card; push in
gently to remove it.
USING EXPANSION CARDS
175
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
1 Open the door of the expansion card
slot.
DID YOU KNOW? If the Ringer switch is set to
Sound On, you hear a confirmation tone when
you insert or remove an expansion card.
4 Close the door of the expansion card
slot.
Removing an expansion card
1 Open the door of the expansion card
slot.
2 Hold your smartphone with the screen
facing you, and hold the card with the
label facing you. The notch on the card
should be in the lower-left corner next to
the keyboard.
3 Insert the card into the expansion card
slot until you feel the card lock into
place.
2 Press the card into the expansion card
slot to release it from the slot.
3 After you feel the expansion card slot
eject the card, remove the card
from the slot.
Notch
176
USING EXPANSION CARDS
2 Select the icon for the application you
want to open.
3 Press Center
application.
4 Close the door of the expansion card
slot.
Opening applications on an expansion
card
After you insert an expansion card into the
expansion card slot, you can open any of
the applications stored on the expansion
card.
1 Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot. Applications View
automatically appears.
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
to open the
TIP Install the Palm® Files application to easily
browse and manage files on an expansion
card. Press Applications, select My Treo,
select the Bonus tab, and then select Files.
Accessing items stored on an expansion
card
When an expansion card contains items,
such as pictures or songs, you can access
those items directly from the card.
1 Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot. Applications View
automatically appears.
2 Select the category pick list in the title
bar, and select All.
3 Select the icon for the application in
which you want to open the item. For
example, to view a picture, select
Pics&Videos.
USING EXPANSION CARDS
177
CHAPTER
9
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
Copying applications between an
expansion card and your smartphone
Before you copy an application to an
expansion card, make sure that it is
compatible with Palm OS software version
5.4.5 or later. Some applications do not work
with expansion cards and do not allow you to
store files in a location that is separate from
the application.
TIP
You can copy applications from your Treo
smartphone to your expansion card and
vice versa.
1 Press Applications
2 Press Menu
4 Select the Copy To pick list and select
the destination: Phone or <card
name>.
5 Select the From pick list and select the
location of the application you want to
copy: Phone or <card name>.
6 Highlight the application you want to
copy.
7 Select Copy.
Viewing expansion card information
.
.
3 Select Copy from the App menu.
The Card Info application displays general
information about the expansion card that
is currently in the expansion card slot. It
also enables you to rename and format a
card.
Press Applications
Card Info
.
178
USING EXPANSION CARDS
and select
Before copying information to, renaming,
or formatting an expansion card, make sure
the card is not write-protected. See the
instructions that came with your card for
details.
TIP
5 Select Rename Card from the Card
menu.
9
CHAPTER
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
6 Enter a new name for the card.
7 Select Rename.
Formatting an expansion card
Renaming an expansion card
If you change the contents of an expansion
card, you can rename the card to better
match its contents and to make it easy to
identify wherever you insert it.
1 Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot. Applications View
automatically appears.
2 Select the category pick list at the top
of the screen and select All.
3 Select Card Info
4 Press Menu
.
.
Formatting an expansion card is similar to
formatting a disk on a computer. When
you format an expansion card, you erase all
the information stored on the card.
1 Insert the expansion card into the
expansion card slot. Applications View
automatically appears.
2 Select the category pick list at the top
of the screen and select All.
3 Select Card Info
4 Press Menu
.
.
5 Select Format Card from the Card menu.
6 Select OK.
USING EXPANSION CARDS
179
YOUR APPLICATION AND INFO MANAGEMENT TOOLS
CHAPTER
9
180
USING EXPANSION CARDS
C H A PT ER
10
Your personal settings
Customizing your Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone is a great way
to make it match your lifestyle and work even harder for you.
On your smartphone, you can easily customize the sounds,
fonts, screen colors, and more. Take advantage of different
levels of security. Prevent making an accidental (and expensive)
phone call by locking the keyboard. Some settings can help
extend the life of your smartphone battery. There are lots of
ways to make your smartphone work better for you.
Benefits
•
Access applications quickly
•
Conserve power
•
Make your screen easy to read
•
Enjoy your smartphone more
In this chapter
System sound settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Display and appearance settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Applications settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Locking your smartphone and info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Connection settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
System sound
settings
When you slide the Ringer switch back to
Sound On
, it restores the previous
sound settings.
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
Silencing sounds
You can immediately silence all alerts,
ringtones, music that plays through the
built-in speaker, and system sounds by
sliding the Ringer switch to Sound Off
This does not mute the audio during a
phone call.
.
Sound Off
Sound On
Setting system volume levels
? Your smartphone includes a
DID YOU KNOW
silent alarm that can vibrate even when the
Ringer switch is set to Sound Off. For info on
setting the vibrate option, see the section on
setting alert tones in the chapters that
describe the individual applications.
You can set the volume level for system
sounds, such as the tone that plays when
you synchronize.
If the Ringer switch is set to Sound Off,
the ringer setting overrides the sound settings
and all sounds are turned off.
TIP
1 Slide the Ringer switch to Sound
Off
. Your smartphone vibrates once
to let you know that you’ve turned
sounds off.
1 Press Applications
Sounds
.
2 To hear all sounds again, slide the
Ringer switch to Sound On
.
2 Select the Application pick list and
select System.
and select
3 Select the System Volume and Game
Volume pick lists and select the volume
levels.
SYSTEM SOUND SETTINGS
183
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
CHAPTER
10
2 Press Left
brightness.
and Right
to adjust the
3 Select Done.
To automatically set the backlight to the
preset low setting, press Option + Menu.
TIP
You can also adjust the backlight and set
the brightness duration during a call in Power
Preferences. See Optimizing power settings.
TIP
4 Select Done.
Changing the screen font
Display and
appearance settings
Adjusting the brightness
Depending on the lighting conditions in
which you’re using your smartphone, you
may need to adjust the brightness of the
screen and keyboard backlight.
1 Press Option
Backlight
.
, and then press
Backlight
184
DISPLAY AND APPEARANCE SETTINGS
You can change the screen font in
Calendar, Contacts, Memos, Messaging,
Tasks, and Web. The font styles may vary
between applications and some
applications may offer fewer choices.
1 Open the application in which you want
to change the font.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Options, and then select Font.
4 Select a font style. (In the web browser,
select the Font size pick list and select
Large or Small.)
Small
Large
Small bold
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
Large bold
5 Select OK.
Setting display formats
Formats Preferences enable you to select
number conventions based on geographic
regions. For example, in the United
Kingdom, time often is expressed using a
24-hour clock. In the United States, time is
expressed using a 12-hour clock with an
AM or a PM suffix. Many of the built-in
applications on your Treo smartphone use
the Formats Preferences settings.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
2 Select Formats.
3 Set any of the following preferences:
Preset to: The standard number
conventions for your country. When you
select a country, the other Formats
Preferences are automatically set to
that country’s conventions. You can also
edit each option individually.
Time: The time format. Select HH:MM
to display a 24-hour clock.
Date: The date format.
Week starts: The first day of the week
(usually Sunday or Monday).
Numbers: The format for numbers with
decimal points and commas.
4 Select Done.
Aligning the screen
Occasionally, your smartphone screen may
need to be readjusted. If this occurs, you
may see the wrong feature being activated
when you tap the screen. To fix the
problem, you can align the screen at any
time.
DISPLAY AND APPEARANCE SETTINGS
185
CHAPTER
10
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
2 Select Touchscreen.
3 Follow the onscreen instructions and
tap the screen where indicated.
4 Select Done.
You can also set the wallpaper for the
Phone application’s Main View (see
Customizing the Phone application’s
Main View) and the background for the
Calendar Agenda View (see Customizing
display options for your calendar).
TIP
4 Select Done.
Changing the system color scheme
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
Applications settings
2 Select Color Theme.
3 Select a color scheme from the list.
186
APPLICATIONS SETTINGS
You can change the Applications settings
on your smartphone so that you can easily
access the applications you use most
often. You can arrange and display your
applications by category, reassign
the buttons on your smartphone, and
select default applications for specific
tasks.
Arranging applications by category
You can assign an application to a category
and then display a specific category of
applications in Applications View.
1 Press Applications
2 Press Menu
.
.
3 Select Category on the App menu.
4 Select the pick list next to each
application and select a category.
5 Select Done.
To create a new category, select the
category pick list and select Edit Categories.
Select New, and then enter the category
name. Select OK to close the dialog box, and
then select OK.
TIP
? If there is an expansion card in
the expansion card slot, the card appears in
the category pick list and is treated as a
category when you press Applications
repeatedly.
DID YOU KNOW
Displaying applications by category
Do one of the following:
•
Press Applications
repeatedly to
cycle through the categories.
•
Select the category pick list at the top
of the screen and select a category.
Select All to display all of your
applications.
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
Changing Applications View
By default, Applications View displays each
application as an icon. As an alternative,
you can view a list of applications. The list
view is particularly useful when you have
so many applications in a category that the
applications fill up more than one screen.
1 Press Applications
2 Press Menu
.
.
3 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
4 Select the View By pick list and select
List.
5 Select OK.
Reassigning buttons
With Buttons Preferences you can select
which applications are associated with the
quick buttons and the Side button on your
Treo smartphone. You can assign a primary
and secondary application to each of the
APPLICATIONS SETTINGS
187
CHAPTER
10
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
three quick buttons that open an
application.
NOTE We recommend that you keep the
primary button assignments on the factory
settings until you become comfortable with
the features of your smartphone. If you do
change the primary button assignments,
remember that the instructions in this
guide and in the other help features refer to
the original button settings.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
188
and select
4 Select Done.
DID YOU KNOW? You can also choose an
application to open with the sync button on
the USB sync cable. To change this setting,
select HotSync on the Buttons Preferences
screen.
To restore all the buttons and key
combinations to their factory settings, select
Default.
TIP
DID YOU KNOW? Some third-party applications
automatically take over a button when you
install the application.
2 Select Buttons.
Changing default applications
3 Select the pick list next to the button,
Option
+ button, or Side button that
you want to reassign, and then select
an application.
Sometimes one application looks for
another application to handle information
(for example, a mail application might open
a browser when you select a link in an
email message). Your smartphone comes
with a set of predefined applications to
handle email, messaging, and browser
requests from other applications. If you
have more than one application to handle
these requests on your smartphone, you
can specify which application you want to
use for each function.
APPLICATIONS SETTINGS
Keyboard (Keyguard): You can use the
Keyguard feature to disable the keyboard
and all buttons to prevent accidental
presses in your bag or pocket.
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
Screen: You can disable the screen’s
touch-sensitive feature during an active call
or call alert.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
2 Select Default Apps.
3 Select each pick list and select the
application you want to associate with
that function.
4 Select Done.
Locking your
smartphone and info
Your Treo smartphone includes several
features to protect your smartphone
from inadvertent use and keep your
information private. You can lock any of the
following features on your smartphone:
Phone (Phone Lock): You can set your
phone to require a password to make calls.
The built-in security software lets you
make emergency calls even if your phone
is locked.
Smartphone: You can set your
smartphone to require a password for you
to see any information on your
smartphone.
Entries: You can mask or hide entries
marked as private and set your smartphone
to require a password for viewing them.
Locking your keyboard (Keyguard)
The Keyguard feature locks the keyboard so
that you don’t accidentally press buttons or
activate items on the screen while your
smartphone is in a pocket or bag.
LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO
189
CHAPTER
10
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
By default, Keyguard turns on whenever
the screen is off. Each time you wake up
the screen, you must turn off Keyguard to
unlock the keyboard and use your
smartphone.
To turn off Keyguard, do the following:
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
2 Select Keyguard.
3 Select the Auto-Keyguard pick list, and
then do one of the following:
•
Select how quickly you want Keyguard
to turn on: When power is turned
off, 5 seconds after power off, or 30
seconds after power off.
•
Select Disable to completely disable
the Keyguard feature until you turn it
on again.
1 When the screen is off, press Power/
End
to wake up the screen.
2 Press Center
and select
to turn off Keyguard.
4 Select Done.
Locking your screen
If you disabled Keyguard, you can turn
Keyguard on manually by pressing Option +
Power/End when the screen is on.
You can set your smartphone to
automatically lock the screen’s
touch-sensitive features in certain
situations.
TIP
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
2 Select Keyguard.
You can change how quickly Keyguard turns
on, or you can disable this feature
altogether. To change the Keyguard
settings, do the following:
190
LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO
3 Check any of the following boxes:
Incoming calls received: Disables the
screen when the phone rings. You must
use the 5-way
to select the
onscreen Answer and Ignore buttons,
or press Send
to answer the call
or Power/End
to ignore the call.
On a call: Disables the screen after
you answer a call. You must use the
5-way
to select the onscreen
buttons during the call. Use this setting
to avoid accidentally pressing onscreen
buttons while you’re holding your
smartphone near your ear to speak.
4 Select Done.
DID YOU KNOW? When you check the boxes to
disable the touchscreen during a call, the
touchscreen is automatically enabled again
after you end the call.
Locking your phone (Phone Lock)
You can lock your phone to prevent
unauthorized calls and use of other
wireless features. When your phone is
locked, you must enter the correct code to
unlock it. You can still place emergency
calls when your phone is locked, however.
When Phone Lock is turned on, other
people can still see the info on your
smartphone, but they cannot make calls or
use the other wireless features without your
password.
TIP
1 Press Phone
2 Press Menu
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
.
.
3 Select Options, and then select Phone
Lock.
4 (Optional) Select Advanced, enter up
to three numbers that you can dial
when your phone is locked, and then
select OK. You do not need to enter the
standard emergency call number for
your area, such as 911, as one of the
three numbers, because this number is
always available.
5 Select one of the following Phone Lock
options:
On phone power off: Locks your phone
each time you turn it off. When this
setting is active, you must enter your
lock code each time you turn your phone
on again.
Immediately: Locks your phone when
you select OK. The next time you dial a
LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO
191
CHAPTER
10
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
number, you must enter your lock code
to unlock your phone. After that, you
can continue to make calls without
entering your lock code, unless you
select one of these Phone Lock options.
6 When prompted, enter the lock code,
and then select OK. (Unless you
changed your lock code, it is the last
four digits of your phone number.)
7 If you want to change the lock code,
select Change Lock Code, enter a new
lock code, and then select OK. Repeat
this step to verify the new lock code.
8 Select OK.
If you selected Immediately in step 5, your
phone locks right away. If you selected On
phone power off, your phone locks the next
time you press and hold Power/End
to turn off your phone.
If you want to lock your phone once in a
while, use the Immediately option to lock your
phone on demand.
TIP
To disable the current Phone Lock settings:
1 Press Menu
192
.
LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO
2 Select Options, and then select Phone
Lock.
3 Uncheck the On phone power off box.
4 Enter your lock code to change this
setting.
5 Select OK twice.
Locking your smartphone
To protect your personal information, you
can lock your smartphone. When your
smartphone is locked, you need to enter
your password to access any of your
information or to use any of the features on
your smartphone, including the phone. You
can still make emergency calls, however,
when your smartphone is locked.
IMPORTANT If you lock your smartphone,
you must enter the exact password to
unlock it. If you forget the password, you
need to perform a hard reset to resume
using your smartphone. Performing a hard
reset deletes all the entries in your
smartphone. However, you can restore all
previously synchronized info the next time
you sync (see Synchronizing information—
the basics).
1 Press Applications
Security
.
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
and select
2 Select the Password box.
On power off: Locks your smartphone
when you turn off the screen, or when it
shuts off with the Auto-off feature.
3 Assign a password and a password hint.
4 Select the Auto Lock Device box.
5 When prompted, enter your password
and select OK.
6 Select one of the following options:
Never: Prevents your smartphone from
locking automatically.
At a preset time: Locks your
smartphone at a specific time of day.
After a preset delay: Locks your
smartphone after a period of inactivity.
7 Select OK.
8 Do one of the following:
•
Select Lock & Turn Off to lock your
smartphone immediately.
•
Press Applications
to accept
your settings and continue using your
smartphone.
LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO
193
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
CHAPTER
10
After you create a password, you can lock
your system manually. Press Applications
and select Security. Select Lock & Turn Off,
and then select Off & Lock.
TIP
To change your password, select the
Password box, enter your current password,
and then enter the new password. To delete
your password, select the Password box and
then select Unassign.
TIP
a password, you (or anyone else) can reveal
private entries without a password.
1 Display the entry that you want to mark
private.
2 Select Details.
3 Check the Private box.
4 Select OK.
Hiding or masking all private entries
Working with private entries
In most applications you can mark
individual entries as private. All private
entries remain visible and accessible until
you select the Security setting. You have
two Security setting options:
•
Hide Records: Private entries do not
appear anywhere in the application.
•
Mask Records: Private entries are
replaced with a visual placeholder
where the entry would normally appear.
After you enable the mask or hide setting,
any entries marked as private are
immediately hidden or masked. If you
define a password, you must enter it to
display private entries. If you do not define
194
LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO
Make sure the entries you want to mask or
hide are marked private.
1 Press Applications
Security
.
and select
2 Select the Current Privacy pick list and
select either Hide Records or Mask
Records.
3 If prompted for your password, enter it
and then select OK.
Viewing all private records
You can reveal all the entries you’ve hidden
or masked.
1 Press Applications
Security
.
and select
2 Select the Current Privacy pick list and
select Show Records.
3 If prompted for your password, enter it
and then select OK.
You can also access the systemwide
security settings while you’re in an
application, such as Calendar. Press Menu,
select Options, and then select Security.
TIP
Security and Palm Desktop software
(Windows)
®
The Windows version of Palm® Desktop
software observes the security password
for your Treo smartphone. If you forget
your password, you cannot view your
information in Palm Desktop software. If
your smartphone is unlocked, you can
change your password on your
smartphone, but all entries marked as
private are deleted. You can restore your
private entries the next time you sync.
Follow these steps to recover from a lost
password:
1 Press Applications
Security
.
and select
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
3 Select Lost Password.
4 Select Yes.
If you want additional security for
Palm Desktop files, you may want to
purchase a third-party solution.
TIP
Entering owner information
You can use Owner Preferences to record
information that you want to associate with
your Treo smartphone, such as your name,
company name, and home phone number.
If you lock your smartphone (see Locking
your smartphone), the Owner Preferences
information appears on the screen that
requests your password to unlock it, and
you must also enter your password to
change the Owner Preferences
information.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
2 Select Owner.
3 If you assigned a password with the
Security application, select Unlock,
enter your password, and then select
OK to continue.
2 Select the Password box.
LOCKING YOUR SMARTPHONE AND INFO
195
CHAPTER
10
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
4 Enter the text that you want to appear in
the Owner Preferences screen.
5 Select Done.
3 Select the Automatically set pick list
and select one of the following settings:
System settings
NOTE The options that appear on the
screen vary based on the setting you select
in step 3.
Setting the date and time
By default, your smartphone synchronizes
the date, time, and time zone with the
network when your phone is on and you
are inside a coverage area. Date & Time
Preferences also enable you to manually
set the date, time, and location (time zone)
setting for your smartphone.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
196
2 Select Date & Time.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
and select
Nothing: No info is acquired from your
wireless service provider network. You
must set the date, time, and time zone
yourself.
Date and time: The date and time are
acquired from your wireless service
provider network. You must set the time
zone yourself.
Date, time, and time zone: The date,
time, and time zone are acquired from
your wireless service provider network.
You cannot change any of the settings.
4 If the Location pick list appears, select
it, and then select a city in your time
zone.
10
CHAPTER
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
2 Select Power.
3 Set any of the following preferences:
Brightness: Sets the intensity of the
screen and keyboard backlights. Drag
the slider or press Left and Right
to adjust the brightness level.
Don’t see a city in your time zone? Select
Edit List, select Add, select a city in your
time zone, and then select OK. If necessary,
modify any of the settings in the Edit
Location dialog box, and then select OK.
TIP
5 If the Date and Time fields appear,
select the Date field and select the
date, and then select the Time field and
select the time.
6 Select Done.
You can also set time zones for Calendar
events. See Creating an event.
TIP
Optimizing power settings
Power Preferences enable you to adjust
settings to maximize your smartphone’s
battery performance.
1 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
Auto-off after: Determines how long
your screen stays on during a period of
inactivity. When there is no interaction
with the keyboard or screen for the
specified time period, your smartphone
turns off automatically.
On a call, dim backlight after:
Determines how long the backlight
stays on at normal intensity during a
phone call. After the specified time
period, the backlight dims to conserve
power during a long phone call.
SYSTEM SETTINGS
197
CHAPTER
10
YOUR PERSONAL SETTINGS
Beam Receive: Determines whether
your Treo smartphone is ready to
receive information over an infrared
beam. If you leave this option turned off,
you must return to this screen to turn
on this option the next time you want to
receive a beam.
4 Select Done.
You can also access the brightness setting
by pressing Option + P. To temporarily dim
the screen’s brightness, press Option +
Menu.
TIP
server through the company’s firewall
(security layer). You need a VPN client on
your smartphone if your smartphone and
your company’s server are located on
opposite sides of the firewall.
Check with your company’s system
administrator to see if a VPN is required to
access the corporate server. If a VPN is
necessary, you must purchase and install a
third-party VPN client on your smartphone
to use this feature.
For information about third-party VPN
client software, visit http://go.palm.com/
treo755p/.
TIP
Connection settings
Connecting to a virtual private network
If you want to use your Treo smartphone to
access your corporate email account or
other files on your corporate server, you
may need to set up a virtual private
network (VPN) on your smartphone. A VPN
enables you to log in to your corporate
198
CONNECTION SETTINGS
1 Install your third-party VPN client. See
Installing applications for details.
2 Press Applications
Prefs
.
and select
3 Select VPN.
4 Enter the settings provided by your
corporate system administrator.
C H A PT ER
11
Common questions
Although we can’t anticipate all the questions you might have,
this chapter provides answers to some of the most commonly
asked questions. For additional information and answers to
other common questions, visit http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.
In this chapter
Upgrading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Desktop software installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Resetting your smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Replacing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Hands-free devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Camera. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Making room on your Treo™ smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Third-party applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Error messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Upgrading
If you experience problems with your
Palm® Treo™ 755P smartphone after
performing the upgrade steps in Upgrading
from another Palm OS® device of this
guide, you may have incompatible
applications or settings that were not
quarantined during the installation process.
These incompatible applications or settings
can lead to numerous issues, including
system resets and freezes. If you
experience a problem after upgrading,
follow the steps in this section to remove
the incompatible apps from your
smartphone and to transfer your other info
to your smartphone.
NOTE If you have trouble installing a
third-party application, contact the
developer for assistance.
•
Set data connection features, such as
activating or ending data connections
•
Provide web clipping features, such as
PQA files
•
Provide instant messaging features
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
If you want to continue using these types
of applications, please contact the
third-party developer for software updates
and info about compatibility with your Treo
755P smartphone.
WINDOWS ONLY
Windows Vista users: Before inserting
the Palm Software Installation CD, go to
www.palm.com/windowsvista, where
you’ll find instructions and information
about using your smartphone and desktop
software with Windows Vista.
1 On your computer, click
Start>Programs>Palm>Safe HotSync.
2 Follow the instructions on the screen.
We recommend that you do not install
apps that do any of the following:
•
Modify phone functions, such as
ringtones, dialing, or caller ID
•
Replace organizer features, such as
Contacts or Calendar
3 Locate the Old_Apps folder on your
computer. This folder is usually located
inside one of the following folders:
C:\Program Files\Palm\
C:\Program Files\palmOne\
C:\Program Files\Handspring\
UPGRADING
201
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
4 To help you identify the app that is
causing the problem, move one app at a
time from the Old_Apps folder to the
Backup folder, and then sync.
If the problem recurs, delete the last
app you installed and report the
problem to its developer.
3 Confirm that your copy includes the
Backup subfolder and that all the files in
the original Backup subfolder are also in
the copy of the Backup subfolder.
5 Repeat step 4 for each of the apps in
the Old_Apps folder.
4 Delete all files from the original Backup
subfolder.
NOTE If you have trouble moving apps
from the Old_Apps folder to the Backup
folder, or determining which files to move,
try reinstalling the app using the original
third-party developer files.
Need more info on the Backup folder? See
What is the backup folder?
TIP
MAC ONLY
1 Locate your user folder on your
computer.
NOTE Your user folder name is the same
as your device name and is usually found in
this location: <Mac hard drive> : Users :
<your Mac username> : Documents : Palm
: Users
202
2 Select your user folder and Option-drag
it to your Mac desktop to make a copy
of that folder.
UPGRADING
5 Perform a hard reset on your Treo 755P
smartphone. See Resetting your
smartphone for instructions.
6 Sync your new smartphone with your
new desktop software and be sure to
select your existing device name from
the User list.
7 To help you identify the app that is
causing the problem, move one
third-party app from the copy of the
Backup subfolder to the original Backup
subfolder, and then sync.
If the problem recurs, delete the last
app you installed and report the
problem to its developer.
8 Repeat step 7 for each of the third-party
apps in the copy of the Backup folder.
Desktop software
installation
If you are having trouble installing the
desktop software, you may have the wrong
version of the software or some of your
computer’s resources may be unavailable.
Windows Vista users: Before inserting
the Palm Software Installation CD, go to
www.palm.com/windowsvista, where
you’ll find instructions and information
about using your smartphone and desktop
software with Windows Vista.
The Palm Software Installation CD installs
software that lets you synchronize using
Palm® Desktop software (included) or
Microsoft® Outlook® for Windows (sold
separately). If you want to synchronize using a
different personal information manager (PIM),
you must install a third-party solution. Contact
the PIM’s vendor to learn if software is
available for your smartphone.
TIP
Follow these steps to retry the installation:
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
1 Make sure your computer profile
includes administrator rights to install
software. In large organizations, these
are usually granted by the system
administrator.
2 Restart your computer.
3 Quit any active applications, including
virus scanners and Internet security
applications.
4 Make sure you’re installing the software
from the Palm Software Installation CD
that came with your new smartphone.
Other versions of the desktop software
may not work with this Treo
smartphone.
5 Insert the Palm Software Installation CD
to restart the installation.
IMPORTANT Always use the same
language for your Treo smartphone, your
operating system, and your desktop
software. Otherwise, you may lose
information or have difficulty with
synchronization. Support is not provided for
mismatched language setups.
DESKTOP SOFTWARE INSTALLATION
203
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
Resetting your
smartphone
Performing a soft reset
A soft reset is similar to restarting a
computer. If your smartphone is not
responding or you have trouble
synchronizing with your computer, a soft
reset may help. All your info is retained
when you perform a soft reset.
1 Remove the battery from your
smartphone, and then reinsert it.
Don’t know how? See Replacing the
battery.
NOTE The reset begins when you reinsert
the battery.
2 At the end of the soft reset, Date &
Time Preferences appears. Select
Done.
Performing a system reset
A system reset, also called a safe or warm
reset, tells your smartphone to stop what
it’s doing and start over again without
204
RESETTING YOUR SMARTPHONE
loading any system extras. If your
smartphone loops or freezes during or after
a soft reset, a system reset may help.
Performing a system reset can release your
smartphone from an endless loop so that
you can uninstall a third-party application
that may be causing the looping.
1 Remove the battery from your
smartphone.
2 Press and hold Up
the battery.
while reinserting
Don’t know how? See Replacing the
battery.
3 When Date & Time Preferences
appears, release Up .
4 Delete the third-party application that
you suspect is causing the problem.
5 Perform a soft reset. The wireless
features of your smartphone are not
available until you complete this step.
Performing a hard reset
A hard reset erases all information and
third-party software on your Treo
smartphone. Never perform a hard reset
without first trying a soft reset and a
system reset and trying to resolve
third-party software issues. (See
Third-party applications for suggestions on
diagnosing third-party software issues.)
After performing a hard reset, you can
restore previously synchronized
information the next time you sync.
3 When the Access Powered logo
appears, release Power/End
.
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
4 When the Erase all data? prompt
appears, press Up
to confirm the
hard reset.
IMPORTANT If a Reformatting in
IMPORTANT If you set a password on
your smartphone, performing a hard reset
reformats your smartphone. This is a more
severe form of a hard reset, which
removes all your information, and restores
your formats, preferences, and other
settings to the factory default settings.
Some third-party applications do not
create a backup on your computer when you
synchronize. If you perform a hard reset, you
may lose data in these applications and you
will need to reinstall the application after the
hard reset. Please contact the application’s
developer to find out which data is backed up
during synchronization.
TIP
1 Remove the battery from your device.
2 Press and hold Power/End
while
reinserting the battery. See Replacing
the battery.
progress message appears, do not touch
your smartphone until the process is
complete. This may take up to 10 minutes.
5 When the language selection screen
appears, select the same language you
selected for your desktop software.
IMPORTANT Always use the same
language for your Treo smartphone, your
operating system, and your desktop
software. Otherwise, you may lose
information or have difficulty with
synchronization. Support is not provided for
mismatched language setups.
6 Follow the onscreen instructions to
align the screen and set the date and
time.
7 (Optional) If you want to confirm that
the hard reset was successful, press
Applications
and select
RESETTING YOUR SMARTPHONE
205
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
HotSync
. If you see your device
name in the upper-right corner, the hard
reset was not successful.
Replacing the battery
Your Treo 755P smartphone comes with a
replaceable battery. Be sure to use a
replacement battery that is recommended
or sold by Palm and is compatible with the
Treo 755P smartphone. Failure to use the
proper battery may result in a risk of
personal injury or product damage, and it
voids your smartphone warranty.
1 Press Power/End
screen.
to turn off the
2 Press the battery door release, and
slide the battery door downward
to remove it from your smartphone.
206
REPLACING THE BATTERY
Battery door
release
3 Place a finger in the notch next to the
battery, and lift up the old battery at a
45-degree angle to remove it from the
compartment.
4 Align the metal contacts on the new
battery with the contacts inside the
battery compartment.
Battery
contacts
Smartphone
contacts
Notch
Screen
The screen appears blank
1 When a call lasts longer than the limit
specified in Power Preferences, the
screen dims automatically. In certain
lighting conditions, the screen may
appear blank when this occurs.
Press any key except Power/End to
restore the screen to normal brightness.
Pressing Power/End hangs up the call.
5 Insert the new battery into the
compartment at a 45-degree angle,
pressing it into place. Slide the battery
door onto the back of the smartphone
until it clicks into place.
2 When a period of inactivity lasts longer
than the limit specified in Power
Preferences, the screen turns off. Press
and release Power/End
to
wake up the screen.
6 Connect your smartphone to the
charger or sync cable.
3 Look closely at the screen. If you can
see a dim image, try adjusting the
screen brightness (see Adjusting the
brightness).
7 Wait for your Treo smartphone to turn
on, and then enable the network time or
set the date and time when prompted.
Be sure to dispose of your old battery
properly. In some areas, disposal in household
or business trash is prohibited.
TIP
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
4 If the screen is still blank, perform a soft
reset (see Performing a soft reset).
5 If the problem persists, connect your
smartphone to the charger (see
Charging the battery) and perform a soft
reset again.
SCREEN
207
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
6 If that doesn’t work, perform a hard
reset (see Performing a hard reset).
To find carrying cases that protect the
screen, and other useful accessories, visit
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.
TIP
There’s a blinking bell in the upper-left
corner
The blinking bell in the upper-left corner of
the screen is the Alert screen symbol. It
appears when you have alarms or
messages that you haven’t acknowledged.
The screen doesn’t respond accurately to
taps or it activates wrong features
1 Press and hold Center
or tap the
blinking bell
with your stylus.
1 Press Applications
and use the
5-way
to select Prefs
.
2 When the list of pending alerts appears,
do either of the following:
2 Use the 5-way
Touchscreen.
to select
3 Follow the onscreen instructions to
align the screen.
•
Select the alert text to view the item
and keep it in the list.
•
Check the box next to an alert to clear
it from the list, and then select Done.
4 Select Done.
208
5 If the problem persists, check for dirt
between the screen and the edge of the
smartphone.
Synchronization
6 If you’re using a screen protector, make
sure that it is properly installed.
Synchronization backs up the information
from your smartphone onto your computer
and vice versa. If you ever need to perform
a hard reset or otherwise need to erase all
your information on your smartphone, you
can synchronize your smartphone with
your computer to restore the info. Similarly,
if your computer crashes and your
Palm Desktop info is damaged, you can
SYNCHRONIZATION
recover your info by synchronizing with
your smartphone. To make sure you always
have an up-to-date backup of your info,
synchronize frequently.
This section describes synchronization
between your Treo smartphone and a
desktop computer running Palm Desktop
software. You can also synchronize the
information on your smartphone using
third-party applications. See the separate
documentation for the third-party
application for information on features and
configuration.
Before you attempt to synchronize, make
sure you’ve installed the desktop
synchronization software from the Palm
Software Installation CD.
Every device needs a unique name. Never
synchronize more than one device to the
same device name on your computer.
TIP
I can’t find my user folder
WINDOWS ONLY If your device name is
one word, your user folder name is the first
six characters of your device name. If your
device name is two words, your user folder
name consists of the first six characters of
the second word of your device name
followed by the first letter of the first word.
For example, if your device name is John
Smith, your user folder is named SmithJ.
Your user folder is usually located inside
one of the following folders:
C:\Program Files\Palm\
C:\Program Files\palmOne\
C:\Program Files\Handspring\
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
MAC ONLY Your user folder name is the
same as your device name and is usually
found in this location: Mac hard drive :
Users : Your Mac username : Documents
: Palm : Users.
What is the backup folder?
The Backup folder is located inside your
user folder (see I can’t find my user folder).
During synchronization, HotSync® manager
puts a copy of most of your info and
applications into the Backup folder. (Some
third-party apps do not put a copy into the
Backup folder.) The next time you sync,
HotSync manager compares the contents
of the Backup folder to the contents of your
smartphone and then restores any missing
info or applications.
SYNCHRONIZATION
209
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
If an app that you deleted reappears on
your smartphone, try deleting the app from
your Backup folder.
Palm Desktop does not respond to a sync
attempt
1 Make sure that the USB sync cable is
securely connected to the USB port on
your computer and on the bottom of
your smartphone (see Synchronizing
information—the basics).
If you’re having trouble trying to sync
using an IR or Bluetooth® connection, try
using the USB sync cable instead. If this
solves the problem, check your IR or
Bluetooth settings (see Synchronizing
information—advanced).
TIP
2 Make sure that HotSync manager is
running:
Windows: Right-click HotSync
manager
in the taskbar in the
lower-right corner of your computer
screen, and make sure that Local USB
is checked. If you don’t see the HotSync
manager icon, click Start, select
210
SYNCHRONIZATION
Programs, select Palm, and then select
HotSync Manager.
HotSync
manager icon
Mac: Find the Palm folder on your Mac
hard drive. Double-click HotSync
manager
in the Palm folder. In the
Connection Settings panel, set the
Local Setup port to Palm USB.
3 Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
4 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
soft reset).
5 Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
6 If problems persist and you’re
synchronizing through a USB hub, try
connecting the sync cable to a different
USB port or directly to your computer’s
built-in USB port.
7 Reboot your computer.
8 Synchronize. If the synchronization is
successful, you do not need to
complete the remaining steps.
9 Do one of the following:
Windows: Uninstall Palm software.
Click Start, select Settings, select
Control Panel, select Add or Remove
Programs, select Palm Desktop
software, and then click Change/
Remove.
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the
problem persists after completing
step 7. Mac computers do not provide
an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop
software.
10 Reboot your computer.
11 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your smartphone.
Synchronization starts but stops without
finishing
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
The HotSync Log can give you information
about your most recent synchronization.
TIP
Windows: Right-click the HotSync manager
icon in the taskbar in the lower-right corner of
your computer screen, and then select View
Log.
Mac: Open Palm Desktop software. From the
HotSync menu, select View Log.
If you upgraded from a previous Palm OS®
device or received a system error, such as
Sys0505, there may be conflicts with
software on your smartphone.
1 Locate your Backup subfolder and
rename the folder (for example,
BackupOld). Note that “Palm” in the
following locations might be
“Handspring” or “palmOne,” based on
the device you’re upgrading from:
Windows:
C:\Program Files\Palm\device name
Mac:
Mac HD\Applications\Palm\Users\
device name
SYNCHRONIZATION
211
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
2 Synchronize.
3 If the problem is resolved, begin
reinstalling your third-party applications
one at a time by double-clicking a single
file in the original Backup subfolder that
you renamed, and sync after each
application you install. If the problem
recurs, delete the last application you
installed and report the problem to its
developer.
4 Do one of the following:
Windows: If the Windows New
Hardware Wizard appears, the
synchronization process may be timing
out before the wizard completes its job.
Follow all instructions in the New
Hardware Wizard, and then sync again.
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the
problem persists after completing
step 3. Mac computers do not provide
an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop
software.
5 (Windows only) Uninstall Palm Desktop
software. Click Start, select Settings,
select Control Panel, select Add or
Remove Programs, select
212
SYNCHRONIZATION
Palm Desktop software, and then click
Change/Remove.
6 Reboot your computer.
7 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your smartphone.
Synchronization finishes but info doesn’t
appear where it should
1 Make sure you’re synchronizing with
the intended desktop personal
information manager (PIM). The Palm
Software Installation CD enables you to
choose to synchronize with
Palm Desktop software (included) or
Microsoft Outlook for Windows (sold
separately). Reinsert the installation CD
and select Change your
synchronization method if necessary.
If you use a different PIM, you need to
install third-party software to
synchronize. For more info, consult the
company that makes the PIM.
2 If multiple Palm OS devices are
synchronizing with your computer,
make sure you are synchronizing with
the correct device name. If info is not
appearing in Palm Desktop software,
make sure the correct device name is
selected in the User list on the toolbar
of Palm Desktop software.
3 Open HotSync manager on your
computer, and make sure the necessary
conduits are set to Synchronize the
files.
4 Do one of the following:
Windows: Uninstall Palm Desktop
software. Click Start, select Settings,
select Control Panel, select Add or
Remove Programs, select
Palm Desktop software, and then click
Change/Remove.
Mac: Contact Technical Support if the
problem persists after completing
step 3. Mac computers do not provide
an option for uninstalling Palm Desktop
software.
5 Reboot your computer.
6 Reinstall Palm Desktop software from
the Palm Software Installation CD that
came with your smartphone.
7 (Outlook only) If you’re trying to
synchronize offline, set your Outlook
Calendar, Contacts, Notes, and Tasks to
be available offline.
Outlook subfolders and public folders are
not accessible with the included software.
You may want to use a third-party solution
instead.
TIP
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
(Outlook only) If you want to sync your
info with a global Exchange Address Book,
you must copy the addresses to your local
Contacts list in Outlook (right-click the
addresses and select Add to Personal
Address Book).
TIP
For more info on Outlook conduits,
right-click the HotSync manager icon in the
taskbar, select Custom, select an app with
Outlook in its name, and then select Help.
TIP
I have duplicate entries in Microsoft
Outlook after I sync
1 Open Microsoft Outlook (sold
separately) and delete the duplicate
entries.
2 On your computer, go to the Outlook
application with duplicate entries and
manually enter any info you added to
your smartphone since the last time
you synchronized.
3 Right-click HotSync manager
taskbar, and select Custom.
in the
SYNCHRONIZATION
213
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
4 Select the application that has duplicate
entries and also has Outlook in its
name, such as Outlook contacts.
5 Click Change.
6 Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
and then click OK.
7 If more than one Outlook application
has duplicate entries, repeat steps 4
through 6 for each application with
duplicates.
8 Click Done.
9 Synchronize your smartphone and your
computer.
My appointments show up in the wrong
time slot after I sync
If you create an appointment in the wrong
time zone (that is, your desktop was set to
the wrong time zone), it shows up in the
wrong time zone on your smartphone. To
be safe, enable local network time and
avoid assigning time zones to your
appointments.
If you’re using Microsoft Outlook (sold
separately):
1 Make sure that you installed the
Microsoft Outlook conduit that came
with your Treo 755P smartphone. If
you’re not sure whether this software is
installed, reinstall Palm Desktop
software from the Palm Software
Installation CD that came with your
smartphone.
2 Open Microsoft Outlook and correct the
wrong entries.
3 On your computer, manually enter any
Calendar info you added to your
smartphone since the last time
you synchronized.
4 Click HotSync manager
in the
taskbar and select Custom.
5 Select an application that has both
Calendar and Outlook in its name.
6 Click Change.
7 Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
and then click OK.
8 Synchronize your smartphone and your
computer.
214
SYNCHRONIZATION
9 Repeat steps 4 through 6 to open the
Calendar Change HotSync Action
dialog box.
7 Click HotSync manager
in the
taskbar and select Custom.
10 Select Synchronize the files, and then
click OK.
9 Click Change.
You should now be able to assign time
zones to your events without encountering
this problem.
If you’re using Palm Desktop software:
1 On your smartphone, press
Calendar
.
2 Press Menu
.
3 Select Options, and then select
Preferences.
4 Uncheck the New events use time
zones box (if it’s checked).
5 On your computer, open Palm Desktop
software and correct the wrong entries.
6 On your computer, manually enter any
Calendar info you added to your
smartphone since the last time
you synchronized.
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
8 Select Calendar.
10 Select Desktop overwrites handheld,
and then click OK.
11 Synchronize your smartphone and your
computer.
12 Repeat steps 7 through 9 to open the
Calendar Change HotSync Action
dialog box.
13 Select Synchronize the files, and then
click OK.
You should now be able to assign time
zones to your events without encountering
this problem.
IMPORTANT To avoid this problem in the
future, do not assign time zones to your
events. Palm Desktop software does not
support time zones.
SYNCHRONIZATION
215
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
Phone
My smartphone won’t connect to the
mobile network
Signal strength is weak
1 Contact your wireless service provider
to confirm that you have an active data
plan.
Become familiar with low coverage areas
where you live, commute, work, and play.
Then you will know when to expect signal
strength issues. You can check signal
strength by looking at the signal-strength
icon in the title bar of the Phone
application’s Main View. The stronger the
signal, the more bars that appear. If you are
outside a coverage area, no bars appear.
1 If you’re standing, move about ten feet
in any direction.
2 Try the suggestions about signal
strength described in Signal strength is
weak.
3 Turn off your phone and turn it on again
(see Turning your phone on and off).
4 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
soft reset).
The other person hears an echo
•
Try decreasing the volume on your Treo
smartphone to avoid coupling or
feedback on the other person’s end.
This applies to both the speakerphone
and the earpiece.
•
Position the earpiece closer to your ear
to prevent sound leaking back to the
microphone. Keep your hand away from
the microphone hole, which is on the
bottom right side of the smartphone.
•
If you’re using the speakerphone
feature with your smartphone lying on a
2 If you’re in a building, move near a
window. Open any metal blinds.
3 If you’re in a building, move outdoors or
to a more open area.
4 If you’re outdoors, move away from
large buildings, trees, or electrical wires.
5 If you’re in a vehicle, move your Treo
smartphone so that it’s level with a
window of your vehicle.
216
PHONE
flat surface, try turning the smartphone
face down (screen facing the surface).
I hear my own voice echo
If you’re using a Bluetooth hands-free
device, try the following:
•
Move your smartphone closer to the
hands-free device. Audio quality
degrades as the distance between your
smartphone and hands-free device
increases. The effective range for a
device varies between manufacturers.
•
Confirm that no obstructions, including
your body, are between the smartphone
and your hands-free device.
Ask the person on the other end of the call
to turn down the volume on his or her
phone or to hold the phone closer to his or
her ear.
My voice is too quiet on the other end
•
Be sure to place the bottom of the Treo
smartphone, or the hands-free
microphone, close to your mouth.
•
Check the signal-strength
icon in
the title bar of the Phone application’s
Main View. If the signal is weak (few
bars are displayed), try the suggestions
about signal strength described in
Signal strength is weak.
I hear static or interference
Check the signal-strength
icon in the
title bar of the Phone application’s Main
View. If the signal is weak (few bars are
displayed), try the suggestions about signal
strength described in Signal strength is
weak.
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
For best performance, keep your
Bluetooth headset and phone on the same
side of your body.
TIP
My smartphone hangs up when I hold it
to my ear
You may be accidentally pressing the
onscreen Hang Up All button with your
cheek. Try holding the smartphone so that
your face doesn’t press against the screen.
If this is not convenient, you may want to
disable the screen’s touch-sensitive feature
during active calls (see Locking your
screen).
PHONE
217
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
My phone seems to turn off by itself
If a system error and reset occur, the Treo
smartphone automatically turns the phone
on if it was on before the reset. However, if
the smartphone can’t determine if your
phone was on before the reset, the phone
does not automatically turn on (see Turning
your phone on and off). If the problem
persists and you’re using third-party
applications, see Third-party applications
for additional suggestions.
My smartphone makes or answers calls
when it’s in a bag or pocket
Items in your bag or pocket may be
pressing the onscreen Answer button or
otherwise activating screen items. If this
happens, be sure to press Power/End
to turn off the screen before placing
your smartphone in a bag or pocket. You
may also want to disable the screen’s
touch-sensitive feature during incoming
calls (see Locking your screen).
To find carrying cases that can help
prevent your smartphone from making
calls, as well as other useful accessories,
visit http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.
TIP
218
HANDS-FREE DEVICES
The voicemail icon stays on the screen
after I listen to my messages
If the voicemail icon stays in the title bar
after you listen to your messages, you can
manually clear the voicemail icon.
1 In the Phone application, press
Menu
.
2 Select Options and then select Phone
Preferences.
3 Select Clear Voicemail Icon.
Hands-free devices
Bluetooth range is up to 30 feet/10 meters
in optimum environmental conditions.
Performance and range may be affected by
physical obstacles, radio interference from
nearby electronic equipment, and other
factors.
TIP
I can’t make or receive calls using a
Bluetooth hands-free device
I hear static or interference when using
my Bluetooth hands-free device
Confirm all the following:
•
Try moving your Treo smartphone closer
to the hands-free device. Audio quality
degrades as the distance between your
smartphone and hands-free device
increases. The effective range for a
device varies between manufacturers.
•
Confirm that no obstructions, including
your body, are between the smartphone
and your hands-free device.
•
If the problem persists, turn the
Bluetooth setting Off and then turn it
back On again. If it still persists, create a
new partnership with the hands-free
device (see Connecting to a Bluetooth
hands-free device).
•
The Bluetooth device is compatible
with your smartphone. Go to
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/ for a list
of compatible devices.
•
The Bluetooth setting is on when you
press Applications
and select
Bluetooth
.
•
You have already formed a partnership
between your smartphone and your
hands-free device, and the hands-free
device appears in the Trusted Devices
list (see Connecting to a Bluetooth
hands-free device).
•
Your hands-free device is charged and
turned on.
•
Your Treo smartphone is within range of
the hands-free device.
If the problem persists, turn the Bluetooth
setting Off and then turn it On again. If it
still persists, create a new partnership with
the hands-free device (see Connecting to a
Bluetooth hands-free device).
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
For best performance, keep your
Bluetooth headset and phone on the same
side of your body.
TIP
Some features of my Bluetooth
hands-free device don’t work with my
smartphone
•
Check the Palm compatibility list at
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/ to ensure
that your device is compatible.
HANDS-FREE DEVICES
219
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
•
Check the documentation that came
with your device or the manufacturer’s
website for information specific to
your device.
Email
For troubleshooting info on the VersaMail®
application, see the User Guide for the
VersaMail® Application at
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.
Messaging
I can’t send or receive text messages
220
•
Make sure your phone is turned on (see
Turning your phone on and off).
•
Contact your wireless service provider
to verify that your plan includes text
messaging services, that these services
have been correctly activated, and that
they are available at your location. Your
wireless service provider should be able
to tell you if messaging services have
been experiencing transmission delays.
EMAIL
Delays can occur also between the time
that a message is sent and the time it is
received.
•
Verify with the recipient that the
receiving device can handle text
messages.
•
If a text message arrives but does not
display an alert, perform a soft reset
(see Performing a soft reset).
Web
I can’t tell if data services are available
When your phone is on, icons appear in the
title bar in the Phone application’s Main
View to indicate whether data services are
available and whether a data connection is
active. See What are all those icons? for
descriptions of the icons that indicate that
data services are available.
If your phone is on and you do not see any
of the data icons, data services are not
available in your current location.
TIP
My smartphone won’t connect to the
Internet
Your Treo 755P smartphone supports the
1xRTT and EVDO wireless data networks.
To connect to the Internet, you must
subscribe to and activate data services
with your wireless service provider, and
you must be in a location with data
coverage.
1 Press and hold Power/End
to
turn off your phone. Then press
and hold the same button to turn it back
on again.
2 Press Phone
and look for either
the 1xRTT
or EVDO
icon in the
title bar of the Phone application’s Main
View.
3 If you see one of these icons, you are in
a data coverage area. Try connecting to
the Internet again. If you do not see
either of these icons, press
Applications
, select Prefs
,
and continue with the following steps.
4 Select Network.
5 Select the Services pick list and select
EVDO.
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
7 If the connection is successful, go to
the web browser. If you still can’t make
a connection, perform a soft reset (see
Performing a soft reset).
8 If your phone did not turn on
automatically, press and hold Power/
End
to turn on your phone, and
try connecting to the Internet.
9 Contact your wireless service provider
to verify the following:
•
Your subscription plan includes
high-speed data services.
•
Data services have been activated on
your account.
•
Data coverage is available in your
location.
•
There are no data service outages in
your location.
I can’t access a web page
First, make sure you have Internet access:
Open the web browser and try to view
another web page you’ve loaded before. To
ensure you’re viewing the page directly
from the Internet, press Menu
, select
Go, and then select Refresh.
6 Select Connect.
WEB
221
COMMON QUESTIONS
CHAPTER
11
If you can view the other web page after
you refresh it but you still can’t access the
page you were originally trying to view, the
page may contain elements that are not
supported by the web browser. These
include Flash, Shockwave, VBScript,
WMLScript, and other plug-ins.
Some websites use a redirector to their
true home page. If the web browser on
your smartphone can’t follow the
redirector, try using a desktop browser to
see the landing page of the redirector, and
then enter that address in the web browser
on your smartphone.
Your Treo smartphone can open your email
application when you select an email address
on a web page. If nothing happens when you
select the link, make sure your email
application is already set up.
TIP
It takes a long time for a web page to load
If it is taking longer than usual to load web
pages, you may have traveled from an
EVDO service area to a 1xRTT service area.
Although 1xRTT data service is considered
a high-speed data service, it seems slow if
you are used to EVDO speed.
222
WEB
1 Press Phone
and look for either
the 1xRTT
or EVDO
icon in the
title bar of the Phone application’s Main
View.
2 If you see the EVDO
icon, there may
be a problem with the website you are
trying to access. Try opening a different
web page to see if the problem
persists.
3 If you see the 1xRTT
icon, you may
be experiencing the difference in
performance between the two types of
data networks.
4 To be sure there is not a problem with
your connection to your wireless
service provider’s network, press and
hold Power/End
to turn off your
phone. Then press and hold the same
button to turn it back on again.
5 Try opening the web page again to see
if it loads faster.
An image or map is too small on
my screen
The web browser has two modes:
Optimized and Wide Page. Optimized
Mode resizes all images and page
elements to fit in a single column on the
smartphone screen. Switch to Wide Page
Mode to see the full-size image (see
Viewing a web page).
You may also be able to save the image on
your smartphone or on an expansion card
and then view the image later on your
computer.
•
Hold the smartphone as still as
possible. Try supporting your
picture-taking arm against your body or
a stationary object (such as a wall).
•
Keep the subject of the picture still.
Exposure time is longer with lower light
levels, so you may see a blur.
•
For best results, verify that you have the
brightest light source coming from
behind you, lighting the subject’s face.
Avoid taking indoor pictures with the
subject in front of a window or light.
•
Make sure the subject is at least 18
inches away from the camera to ensure
good focus.
A secure site refuses to permit a
transaction
Some websites don’t support certain
browsers for transactions. Please contact
the site’s webmaster to make sure the site
allows transactions using your
smartphone’s Blazer® web browser.
Camera
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
When you synchronize your smartphone
with your computer, your camera images
are stored on your hard drive (see Viewing
pictures and videos on your computer).
Here are some tips for taking good pictures
with the built-in camera:
•
Clean the camera’s lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth.
•
Take pictures in bright lighting
conditions. Low-light images may be
grainy, due to the sensitivity of the
camera.
CAMERA
223
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
Making room on your
Treo™ smartphone
Keep in mind that your smartphone
includes an expansion card slot, and that
you can store applications and information
on expansion cards (sold separately).
However, you still need free memory on
the smartphone itself to run applications
from an expansion card. For more info on
using expansion cards, see Using
expansion cards.
If you store a large number of records or
install many third-party applications, the
internal memory on your smartphone may
fill up. Here are some common ways to
clear space:
•
224
Email: Messages that have large
attachments can quickly consume
memory on your smartphone. Delete
messages with large attachments. If
you have hundreds of messages with or
without attachments, you may want to
delete older messages to make room
(see the User Guide for the VersaMail®
MAKING ROOM ON YOUR TREO™ SMARTPHONE
Application at
http://go.palm.com/treo755p/.
•
Pics&Videos: Large images take up a
lot of memory. Move images to an
expansion card or synchronize them to
your computer, and then delete the
images from your smartphone (see
Viewing pictures and videos on your
computer and Deleting a picture or
video).
•
Music: Music files often consume
excessive memory. Move music files to
an expansion card, or delete large files
from your smartphone (see Transferring
MP3 files from your computer).
•
Internet: If you set a large web browser
cache, you may want to use the web
browser’s advanced Memory
Management settings to clear all recent
pages (see Customizing your web
browser settings).
•
Third-party applications: You can
delete infrequently used applications
(see Removing applications) or move
them to an expansion card (see Copying
applications between an expansion card
and your smartphone).
Third-party
applications
Some third-party applications can cause
conflicts on your smartphone. For example,
third-party applications that were not
written with the Treo smartphone keyboard
and 5-way navigator in mind may cause
errors or strange behavior when you use
the keyboard and 5-way navigator in these
applications. Third-party applications that
modify wireless features may require extra
troubleshooting.
If you recently installed an application and
your device seems to be stuck, try the
following:
1 Perform a soft reset (see Performing a
soft reset).
2 If the problem persists, perform a
system reset (see Performing a system
reset).
3 Delete the most recently installed
application from your smartphone (see
Removing applications).
4 If the problem persists, perform another
system reset.
11
CHAPTER
COMMON QUESTIONS
5 If possible, synchronize your
smartphone with your computer to back
up your most recent info.
6 If you’re unable to perform the
preceding steps or the problem
persists, locate your Backup subfolder
on your computer and rename the
folder (for example, BackupOld). Note
that “Palm” in the following locations
might be “Handspring” or “palmOne,”
based on the device you’re upgrading
from:
WINDOWS ONLY C:\Program
Files\Palm\device name
MAC ONLY Mac
HD\Applications\Palm\Users\device
name
7 Perform a hard reset (see Performing a
hard reset).
8 Sync to restore your Calendar, Contacts,
Tasks, Memos, and Pics&Videos info.
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS
225
CHAPTER
11
COMMON QUESTIONS
9 Do one of the following:
•
•
If the problem is resolved, begin
reinstalling your third-party
applications one at a time by
double-clicking a single file in the
original Backup subfolder that you
renamed, and sync after each
application you install.
If the problem recurs, delete the last
application you installed and report
the problem to its developer.
encounters a system error, it automatically
resets itself and resumes functioning as
normal. If possible, it even turns the phone
back on if it was on before the error
occurred.
Sometimes you might want to know more
about an error. Your Treo smartphone uses
a special interface to show error messages
in greater detail.
1 Press Phone
.
Getting more help
2 Enter #*#377, and then press Send
.
Contact the author or vendor of the
third-party software if you require further
assistance.
3 Review the screen with details about
the conditions that led up to the most
recent automatic reset.
4 Select OK.
Error messages
Your Treo smartphone is designed to
minimize interruptions when a system
error occurs. If your smartphone
226
ERROR MESSAGES
Note that third-party developers create
their own error messages. If you do not
understand an error message, please
contact the developer of the application for
help.
Terms
1xRTT (single carrier [1x] radio
transmission technology)
A wireless technology that provides fast
data transfer and Internet access with
average speeds of 60 to 80Kbps and bursts
of up to 144Kbps.
Alt (alternative)
A keyboard key. Enter a letter on the
keyboard, and then press Alt
to access
variations such as international characters
and symbols.
Beam
The process of sending or receiving an
entry or application using the infrared port
on your Treo smartphone.
Bluetooth® wireless technology
Technology that enables devices such as
smartphones, mobile phones, and
computers to connect wirelessly to each
other so that they can exchange
information over short distances.
Device name
The screen on your Palm® Treo™ 755P
smartphone from which you can open all
applications.
The name associated with your Treo 755P
smartphone that distinguishes it from
other Palm OS® devices. When you first
synchronize your smartphone, you are
asked to give it a device name. This name
appears in the User list in Palm® Desktop
software.
Auto-off interval
Dialog box
The time of inactivity that passes before
the screen on your smartphone turns off.
The wireless features on your smartphone
are unaffected by this setting.
A set of options and command buttons that
is enclosed by a border and that enables
you to carry out a specific task.
Applications
TERMS
227
EVDO (Evolution Data Optimized)
A wireless broadband technology that is
designed for very high speed data transfer
with average download speeds of 400 to
700Kbps. It is capable of reaching
download speeds of up to 1.8Mbps and
upload speeds of up to 156Kbps.
Favorite
A button that provides quick access to a
phone number (speed dial) or commonly
used application (such as Contacts, Web,
or Messaging). You can define up to 70
favorite buttons in the Phone application.
HotSync® manager
The computer application that manages the
synchronization of your Treo smartphone
with your computer.
HotSync technology
The technology that synchronizes your
smartphone and your computer with the
simple press of a button.
Infrared (IR)
A way of transmitting information using
light waves. The IR port on your
smartphone enables you to transfer
228
TERMS
information to other IR devices within a
short radius.
Lithium ion (Li-ion)
The rechargeable battery technology used
in Treo smartphones.
Option key
The keyboard button that enables you to
access the alternative feature that appears
above the letter on each key.
Palm® Desktop software
A PIM application for computers that helps
you manage your personal information and
keep your personal information
synchronized with your Treo smartphone.
Palm OS® software
The operating system of your Treo 755P
smartphone, which is known for its
simplicity of use and for the large number
of compatible third-party applications that
can be added to your Treo 755P
smartphone.
Palm® Quick Install
The component on your Windows
computer that enables you to install Palm
OS applications and other information on
your Treo smartphone.
Partnership
Two Bluetooth devices—for example, your
smartphone and a hands-free device—that
can connect because each device finds the
same passkey on the other device. Once
you form a partnership with a device, you
don’t need to enter a passkey to connect
with that device. Partnership is also known
as paired relationship, pairing, trusted
device, and trusted pair on some devices.
Phone
The application on your Treo smartphone
that enables you to make and receive
phone calls.
generally store contacts, schedules, tasks,
and memos.
SMS (Short Messaging Service)
The service that exchanges short text
messages almost instantly. Text messages
are typically exchanged between mobile
phones. These messages can usually
include up to 160 characters; messages
with more than 160 characters are
automatically split into several messages.
Treo smartphones can send and receive
SMS messages while you are on a voice
call.
Streaming
Technology that enables you to access
media content—for example, watch a
video or listen to an audio program—
directly from the Internet on your
smartphone without needing to download
a file to save on your smartphone.
PIM (personal information manager)
A genre of software that includes
applications such as Palm Desktop
software, Microsoft® Outlook®, Lotus
Notes, ACT!, and the Palm OS organizer
applications on your smartphone. PIMs
User folder
The folder on your computer that contains
the information you enter in Palm Desktop
software and the information you enter on
your smartphone and synchronize with
Palm Desktop software.
TERMS
229
230
TERMS
Important safety and
legal information
FCC Notice
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits
for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause
harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If
this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and
on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
•
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
•
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
•
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from
that to which the receiver is connected.
•
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Antenna Care/Unauthorized Modifications
Use only the supplied integral antenna. Unauthorized antenna
modifications or attachments could damage the unit and may violate
FCC regulations. Any changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
FCC RF Safety Statement
In order to comply with FCC RF exposure safety guidelines, users
MUST use one of the following types of bodyworn accessories.
•
A Palm™ brand body-worn accessory that has been tested for
SAR compliance and is intended for use with this product.
•
An accessory that contains NO metal (snaps, clips, etc.) and
provides AT LEAST 1.5 cm of separation between the users body
and the unit.
Do NOT use the device in a manner such that it is in direct contact
with the body (i.e., on the lap or in a breast pocket). Such use will
likely exceed FCC RF safety exposure limits See www.fcc.gov/oet/
rfsafety/ for more information on RF exposure safety.
The highest reported (FCC) SAR values of the Palm® Treo™ 755P
smartphone, by Palm are:
Maximum SAR
Values
Cellular
PCS
Held to Ear
1.07 (W/1Kg)
1.46 (W/1Kg)
Body - Worn
0.89 (W/1Kg)
0.33 (W/1Kg)
FCC Radiofrequency Emission
This smartphone meets the FCC Radiofrequency Emission
Guidelines and is certified with the FCC as:
FCC ID number: O8F-895.
More information on the smartphone's SAR can be found from the
following FCC Website:
https://gullfoss2.fcc.gov/prod/oet/cf/eas/reports/GenericSearch.cfm.
FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility Your Treo smartphone is compliant
with the FCC Hearing Aid Compatibility (HAC) requirements. For
additional HAC information, including the HAC rating of this product,
please refer to www.palm.com/treoHAC.
Static Electricity, ESD, and Your Palm® Device
Electrostatic discharge (ESD) can cause damage to electronic devices
if discharged into the device, so you should take steps to avoid such
an occurrence.
Description of ESD Static electricity is an electrical charge caused
by the buildup of excess electrons on the surface of a material. To
most people, static electricity and ESD are nothing more than
annoyances. For example, after walking over a carpet while scuffing
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
231
your feet, building up electrons on your body, you may get a shock—
the discharge event—when you touch a metal doorknob. This little
shock discharges the built-up static electricity.
ESD-susceptible equipment Even a small amount of ESD can harm
circuitry, so when working with electronic devices, take measures to
help protect your electronic devices, including your Palm® device,
from ESD harm. While Palm has built protections against ESD into its
products, ESD unfortunately exists and, unless neutralized, could
build up to levels that could harm your equipment. Any electronic
device that contains an external entry point for plugging in anything
from cables to docking stations is susceptible to entry of ESD.
Devices that you carry with you, such as your smartphone, build up
ESD in a unique way because the static electricity that may have built
up on your body is automatically passed to the device. Then, when
the device is connected to another device such as a docking station, a
discharge event can occur.
Precautions against ESD Make sure to discharge any built-up static
electricity from yourself and your electronic devices before touching
an electronic device or connecting one device to another. The
recommendation from Palm is that you take this precaution before
connecting your device to your computer, placing the device in a
cradle, or connecting it to any other device. You can do this in many
ways, including the following:
•
Ground yourself when you’re holding your mobile device by
simultaneously touching a metal surface that is at earth ground.
For example, if your computer has a metal case and is plugged
into a standard three-prong grounded outlet, touching the case
should discharge the ESD on your body.
•
Increase the relative humidity of your environment.
•
Install ESD-specific prevention items, such as grounding mats.
Conditions that enhance ESD occurrences Conditions that can
contribute to the buildup of static electricity in the environment
include the following:
232
•
Low relative humidity.
•
Material type. (The type of material gathering the charge. For
example, synthetics are more prone to static buildup than natural
fibers like cotton.)
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
•
The rapidity with which you touch, connect, or disconnect
electronic devices.
While you should always take appropriate precautions to discharge
static electricity, if you are in an environment where you notice ESD
events, you may want to take extra precautions to protect your
electronic equipment against ESD.
Battery safety information
•
Do not disassemble or open, crush, bend or deform, puncture or
shred.
•
Do not modify or remanufacture, attempt to insert foreign objects
into the battery, immerse or expose to water or other liquids,
expose to fire, explosion or other hazard.
•
Only use the battery for the system for which it is specified.
•
Only use the battery with a charging system that has been
qualified with the system per this standard. Use of an unqualified
battery or charger may present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage,
or other hazard.
•
Do not short circuit a battery or allow metallic conductive objects
to contact battery terminals.
•
Replace the battery only with another battery that has been
qualified with the system per this standard, IEEE-Std-1725-200x.
Use of an unqualified battery may present a risk of fire, explosion,
leakage or other hazard.
•
Promptly dispose of used batteries in accordance with local
regulations.
•
Battery usage by children should be supervised.
•
Avoid dropping the phone or battery. If the phone or battery is
dropped, especially on a hard surface, and the user suspects
damage, take it to a service center for inspection.
•
Improper battery use may result in a fire, explosion or other
hazard.
Precaution against hearing loss
Protect your hearing. Listening to this device at full volume for a long
period of time can damage your hearing.
A pleine puissance, l'écoute prolongée du baladeur peut
endommager l'oreille de l'utilisateur. Consultez notre site web
www.palm.com/fr pour plus d'informations.
Précautions d'usage de votre téléphone mobile
Le taux de DAS(1) (Débit d’Absorption Spécifique) de votre Treo 755P
smartphone est 0,896 w/kg
Conseils d'utilisation pour réduire le niveau d'exposition aux
rayonnements: Utiliser le plus souvent possible les kits piétons
(oreillettes), notamment en cas d'usage fréquent ou prolongé du
téléphone mobile Ils apportent en outre un plus grand confort
d’utilisation.
Eloigner le téléphone mobile de certaines zones sensibles telles que
le ventre chez les femmes enceintes ou le bas-ventre chez les
adolescents, plus particulièrement lors d’une communication.
Utiliser votre téléphone mobile dans de bonnes conditions de
réception. Celle-ci est indiquée sur l’écran de votre téléphone par la
matérialisation de barrettes. 3 ou 4 barrettes, la réception est de
bonne qualité pour passer vos communications. Ce n'est pas
toujours le cas dans certaines zones ou situations, notamment les
parking souterrains, les ascenseurs, en train ou en voiture ou tout
simplement dans un secteur mal couvert par le réseau.
Mesures touchant à la sécurité: Dans certains lieux ou situations,
tels que les avions, les hôpitaux, les stations-service et les garages
professionnels, l'usage du téléphone est interdit. Il est donc impératif
de respecter strictement les consignes de sécurité propres à
chacune de ces situations et d’éteindre votre téléphone lorsque cela
est requis.
Par ailleurs pour éviter les risques d’interférences, les personnes
porteuses d’implants électroniques (stimulateurs cardiaques,
pompes à insuline, neurostimulateurs.) doivent conserver une
distance de 15 cm entre le mobile et l’implant et ne l’utiliser que du
côté opposé au côté où celui-ci est situé.
Téléphoner en conduisant, même avec des équipements qui ne sont
pas interdits par la réglementation, est dangereux car il augmente
potentiellement le risque d’accident provenant de la distraction créée
par la conversation elle même. Aussi, est-il recommandé de ne
jamais téléphoner en conduisant et de considérer que l’utilisation
d’un kit mains-libres n’est pas une solution.
(1) Valeur DAS la plus élevée pour ce modèle de téléphone et pour
une utilisation à l’oreille, communiquée par le constructeur. Le DAS,
exprimé en w/kg, quantifie le niveau d’exposition aux ondes
électromagnétiques et permet de vérifier la conformité des mobiles à
la réglementation française et européenne qui impose que celui-ci
soit inférieur à 2w/kg.
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
233
234
IMPORTANT SAFETY AND LEGAL INFORMATION
Specifications
Radio
Phone features
•
CDMA 800MHz (digital cellular), 1900MHz (PCS), and
1400MHz (GPS)
•
EVDO and 1xRTT
•
Speakerphone
•
Hands-free headset jack (2.5mm, 3- or 4-barrel connector)
•
Microphone mute option
•
TTY/TDD compatible
•
3-way calling
Processor
technology
Intel XScale® processor, 312MHz
Expansion
miniSD card slot
Battery
•
Rechargeable lithium ion
•
Removable for replacement
•
3.5 hours full charge time
Palm OS® version
Palm OS 5.4.9
Camera
•
Still-image capture resolution (1280 x 1024), 1.3 megapixel
•
2x digital zoom
•
Video capture resolution (352 x 288)
•
Automatic light balance
SPECIFICATIONS
235
Size
4.4 in. x 2.28 in. x 0.89 in./112mm x 58mm x 22.5mm with
antenna
Weight
5.6 ounces (160 grams)
Connectivity
•
IR
•
Bluetooth® wireless technology (1.2 compliant)
•
Touch-sensitive LCD screen (includes stylus)
•
65,536 colors (16-bit color)
•
User-adjustable brightness
•
Built-in QWERTY keyboard plus 5-way navigator
•
Backlight for low lighting conditions
•
Phone (including Palm OS®
Favorites, Dial Pad)
Display
Keyboard
Included software
236
SPECIFICATIONS
•
Contacts
•
Memos
•
My Treo® software
•
Tasks
•
Pics&Videos (includes
camera and camcorder)
•
Voice Memo
•
Documents To Go®
•
Calculator Basic and
Advanced
•
Messaging (text)
•
Web browser (Internet)
•
Pocket Tunes™
•
World Clock
•
Calendar
•
Palm® Desktop software and
HotSync® manager
System
requirements
Operating and
storage
temperature range
•
Windows 2000 or XP with USB port
•
Mac OS 10.2–10.3 with USB port
•
Later versions may also be supported
•
32°F to 104°F/0°C to 40°C
•
5% to 90% relative humidity (RH)
SPECIFICATIONS
237
238
SPECIFICATIONS
Index
SYMBOLS
! in Tasks list 145
NUMERICS
1XRTT
connections 222
1xRTT (single carrier) radio
transmission technology
227
1XRTT connections
troubleshooting 221
1xRTT technology 69, 222
24-hour clock 185
3G2 files 118, 122
3GP files 118
5-way navigator 7, 25, 26,
190
A
AC charger 10
accented characters 31, 32
Access Powered devices 3,
166, 212
accessing
Alert screen 157
alternate character list 32
alternate characters 31
application menus 28
applications 34, 48
calculator 158
Call Log 42
command buttons 27
Compose dialog box 88
corporate servers 198
Dial Pad 39, 47, 60
email 75, 78–88, 198
Favorites pages 41
files 149, 198
HotSync manager 172
information 192
items on expansion cards
177
items on pick lists 29
Palm online support 3
Pocket Tunes 127
Quick Tour 2
secure websites 97, 223
web browser 33, 97
web pages 97, 99, 221
World Clock 142
Account Setup command 77
accounts
See also email accounts
conference calls and 50
corporate mail servers and
198
forwarding calls and 51
getting support for 3
setting preferences for 84
voicemail and 44
Accounts command 84
Acrobat file formats 149
activating
items on screen 27
smartphone device 14
Active Call View screen 48,
49
active calls. See phone calls
ActiveSync 174
Add Bookmark command 99
Add Call button 47, 49
Add Contact command 48
Add Favorites dialog box 53
Add New Number prompt 48
Add Song button 128
Add to album command 120
adding
additional security 195
attachments 79–80
Bluetooth devices 57–58,
107
bookmarks 99
business cards 133
INDEX
239
caller ID photos 65, 131
captions to photos 114,
121
categories for applications
187
cities to World Clock 142
contacts 131
email addresses 78
emoticons 89
events 135, 136
expansion cards 175
favorite buttons 52–54
hands-free devices 59
memos 151
multiple recipients 54, 88
partnerships 58, 106
passwords 193, 194
phone numbers 48
pictures to albums 120
playlists 128
private entries 194
QuickText phrases 89
signatures 87
tasks 143
TTY/TDD devices 67
videos to albums 120
voice memos 152
wallpaper 121
Address Bar pick list 99
240
INDEX
addresses
adding multiple recipients
to 54, 88
assigning to favorite
buttons 54
highlighting email 27
sending email and 78
synchronizing 213
text messages and 88, 90
viewing website 104
web links and 97
adjusting screen brightness
184, 197
adjusting volume
alarm tones 140
music 127
phone calls 14, 64, 216
ringer 64
video clips 115
voice memos 153
Advanced Mode (calculator)
158, 159
Advanced Mode command
158
agenda lists 133
Agenda View 60, 134, 139
Alarm check box 136
alarm clock 142
Alarm Sound pick list 141,
146
alarm tones 140
alarms
See also alerts
adding to calendar 136,
140
adding to tasks 144, 146
recording sounds for 141
setting for clock 142
Album command 120
Album list 117, 119, 121
albums. See photo albums;
video albums
alert icon 70
Alert screen 45, 90, 136, 157
Alert Sound pick list 85
alert tones 63, 85, 93
alerts
See also alarms
clearing 158
displaying 157
including message text in
92
receiving messages and
85
responding to 45, 90
aligning the screen 185
Alt key 31, 227
alternate characters 31, 32
alternate characters list 32
anniversaries 137
Answer button 44
answering phone calls 44, 46
antenna 231
applets 97
application buttons 33
application categories 34
application list view 187
Application pick list 183
application preferences 187,
189
applications
See also specific built-in
applications
accessing 34
assigning to Quick Keys
54
associating with buttons
54, 187
beaming 167
categorizing 187
caution for 178, 201
changing screen fonts for
184
closing 33
copying 178
copying text to 103
customizing 186–187
deleting 17, 162, 163, 224
disabling synchronization
for 169
downloading 102, 161
finding text in 157
getting help with 162
installing 160–162, 201,
229
managing 149
moving around in 23
opening 7, 33, 34, 47, 177
playing music and 127
recently used 34
running on expansion
cards 224
sending over Bluetooth
connections 165
setting default 188
switching 47
synchronization defaults
for 21
transferring 16, 17, 165,
167, 178
troubleshooting 201
viewing information about
163
viewing menus for 28
viewing tips for 2
Applications button 7, 34, 37
Applications View
defined 227
displaying applications in
187
opening applications and
33, 177
overview 34
appointments 135, 214
See also events
Archive folder 162
area conversions 159
arrow icons 25
ASF files 118
Attach Signature check box
87
attachments
adding 79–80
displaying 81
downloading 81
multiple files and 80
pictures as 79, 114
removing 79
storing large 224
supported formats for 149
video clips as 79, 115
voice memos as 153
attendee information 137
audio 183
INDEX
241
See also music; voice
memos
Audio Caption command 114
audio captions
adding 114, 121
background music and
119
playing 117
Audio icon 117
Auto answer pick list 59
Auto Lock Device box 193
Auto naming pick list 116
Auto Sync dialog box 84
auto sync failures 85
Auto-complete check box
104
Auto-hide Toolbar option 118
Auto-Keyguard pick list 190
automated voicemail
systems 44
automatic shut-off 197, 227
automating tasks 52
Auto-off After pick list 197
auto-off interval 227
AVI files 118
B
Background check box 139
background music 119
242
INDEX
backgrounds 60, 139
backing up information 17,
21, 205
backlight (keyboard) 30, 184,
197
backlight icon 184
Backspace key 30
Backup folder 163, 202
backup folders 211, 225
Basic Mode (calculator) 158
Basic Mode command 158
basics 2
battery
charging 10–12
disposing 207
installing 9
maximizing life of 12, 38,
197
replacing 12, 206
viewing status of 12
battery door release 8
battery icons 12, 70
Beam Business Card
command 133
Beam Category command
167
Beam command 167
Beam From pick list 167
Beam Receive pick list 198
Beam Status dialog box 167,
168
beaming
battery life and 13
defined 227
overview 166–168
troubleshooting 166, 168
turning off 198
bell 157, 208
birthdays 137
blank screens 207
blank time slots 139
Blazer application
See also web browser
Blazer web browser 97, 223
Blazer web browser. See
also web browser
blinking bell 157, 208
Bluetooth application
opening 57
sending from 164, 165
setting up connections
with 106, 108, 171
visibility options in 165
Bluetooth devices
connecting to 57, 106–
109, 171
disabling or enabling 13,
59, 165
entering passkeys for 107,
109
incoming calls and 46
receiving information from
165
receiving phone calls and
58, 217
sending applications over
165
sending information over
164
setting up 57–58
synchronizing from 171,
172, 210
troubleshooting 219
visibility options for 108
Bluetooth icon 57
Bluetooth icons (Phone) 70
BMP files 117
bonus software. See built-in
applications
Bookmark Page icon 101
bookmark pages 101
bookmarks 99–101, 167
Bookmarks View 100, 101
Bookmarks View icon 100
border glow (highlight) 26
brightness (screen) 13, 184,
197, 207
brightness duration
(backlight) 184, 197
Brightness slider 197
browsing files 177
browsing the web. See web
browsing
built-in applications 2, 160,
162
See also applications;
specific application
built-in camera. See camera
built-in security software 189
Business Card command
133
business cards 133, 167
buttons
See also favorite buttons
accessing command 27
changing defaults for 188
customizing 187
disabling 47, 191
highlighted on screen 26
opening applications with
33
restoring factory defaults
for 188
speed-dialing with 41
Buttons Preferences screen
187
C
cache 105, 224
calculator 31, 158
Calculator application 158–
159
Calculator icon 158
calculator modes 158
calendar
See also Calendar
application
customizing 139–140
deleting events from 138
displaying 134
scheduling events for 135,
136, 137
selecting alarm tones for
140
viewing tasks on 139
Calendar application
changing fonts for 184
changing views for 134
color-coding events 138
creating events 135, 136,
137
displaying events 61
opening 33, 61
overview 133
setting alarms from 136
setting default view 139
INDEX
243
setting display options in
139–140
synchronizing information
in 21
Calendar button 7, 33, 134
Calendar views 134
call lists. See Call Log screen
Call Log button 42
Call Log screen 42, 48
call waiting 49
Call Waiting dialog box 49
caller IDs 64, 65, 131
calls. See phone calls
camcorder 115, 116
camcorder buttons 115
Camcorder icon 114
Camcorder View 114, 116,
121
camera 113, 116, 223
camera buttons (Camera
View) 114
Camera icon 113
camera lens 8
Camera View 113, 116, 121
Cancel button 79
Cancel button (Active Call) 46
Cancel Spkr button 46
cancelling menu selection 28
Caps Lock indicator 31
244
INDEX
Caps Lock mode 31
captions. See audio captions
Card Info application 178,
179
Card Info button 178
card readers 126
carrying cases 208, 218
cascading style sheets 98,
105
categories
adding ringtones for 65
applications and 34, 187
beaming and 167, 168
color-coding in 138
contacts and 132
events and 138, 140
memos and 151
naming 187
receiving from Bluetooth
and 166
sending over Bluetooth
connections 164
tasks and 144, 145, 146
Category command 187
category marker 140
Category pick list 139, 140,
187
CDs 126
Center button 7
certificates 97
Change Lock Code option
192
changing
bookmarks 100
button defaults 188
contact information 132
default applications 188
email accounts 84
events 138
favorite buttons 54
information 15
lock codes 192
owner information 195
passwords 194, 195
playlists 128
QuickText phrases 89
screen fonts 184
wallpaper 39
web page layouts 98
character entry 30, 31, 32,
89
character limits
memos 151
text messages 88
character searches 157
charge indicator 7, 11, 12
charger cable 11
charging
smartphone 10, 11, 13
smartphone battery 10–12
charging status 12
chat icon 92, 94
Chat page (Preferences) 93
Chat screen 92
chat sessions 91, 92, 93
Chat view 91
Choose Songs button 127
Choose Songs command
128
city information 141, 142,
197
City pick list 142
Clear Cache button 105
Clear Cookies button 105
clock 141, 185
See also World Clock
closing
application menus 28
applications 33
pick lists 29
color palette 116
color preferences 93, 116,
186
Color Theme Preferences
screen 186
color-coded category marker
140
color-coding events 138
colored backgrounds 27
command buttons 27
commands. See menu items
completed tasks 144, 145,
146
completion dates 146
components (Treo
smartphone) 1
Compose dialog box 88, 89
Compress Day View check
box 139
compressed files 160, 161
computers
connecting smartphone to
20
downloading applications
to 161
installing applications from
161
installing synchronization
software on 19
quarantined files on 16,
18, 201
synchronizing with 15, 22
transferring information to
21
transferring multimedia to
122
transferring music from
125, 126
Con button (calculator) 159
conduits 135, 213
Conf button 50
conference calls 49, 50, 51
Confirm message deletion
check box 92
conflicting applications 201
conflicting events 139
connecting
headsets 55–56
to Bluetooth devices 57,
106–109
to computers 20
to virtual private networks
198
to websites 97, 106
connections
receiving information over
Bluetooth 165
restrictions for 47
sending information over
Bluetooth 164
setting up Bluetooth 171
troubleshooting 216, 221
TTY devices and 67
INDEX
245
viewing status of 69, 220
constants 159
Contact Edit dialog box 131
contact names 40
contacts
See also Contacts
application
adding photos to 121
assigning caller IDs to 65
creating 131
deleting 133
editing 132
entering phone numbers
for 48, 53
looking up 53
marking as private 132
scrolling through 26
searching for 40, 61, 132
synchronizing 131, 174
viewing details about 41
Contacts application
adding events to 137
changing fonts for 184
opening 131
synchronizing information
in 21
Contacts button 131
Contacts list 27, 133
contracts 1
246
INDEX
conversion functions
(calculator) 158, 159
cookies 97, 104, 105
Copy button 120, 178
Copy command 103, 178
Copy Items dialog box 120
Copy items to pick list 120
Copy to command 120
Copy To pick list 178
copying
applications 178
multimedia files 122, 123
music files 125
phone numbers 39
photos 119
text 103
user folders 202
videos 119
copyrighted materials 119
corporate email accounts
198
corporate servers 21
country-specific preferences.
See language settings
coupling 216
coverage area 13, 63, 68,
216
Coverage in/out pick list 63
crashes 208
Create chats from messages
pick list 93
creating
albums 120
audio captions 114, 121
bookmarks 99
business cards 133
caller ID photos 65, 131
categories for applications
187
chat sessions 92, 93
cities for World Clock 142
contacts 131
email 97
email messages 78
events 135, 136
memos 151
partnerships 58, 106
passwords 193, 194
playlists 128
private entries 194
QuickText phrases 89
signatures 87
tasks 143
text messages 88–89
voice memos 152
wallpaper 121
current date and time 141
current events 61
Current Privacy pick list 194,
195
customer service (wireless
service provider) 3
customer support (Palm) 3
customizing
applications 186–187
bookmarks 101
buttons 187
calendar 139–140
camera 116
chat sessions 93
email 84–87
Keyguard 190
messaging options 92
smartphone 134, 181
system date and time 196
system sounds 183–184
tasks 146
web browser 104–106
D
daily events 134
Daily Repeating Events
check box 140
daily schedules 134
data. See information
data service icons 220
data services 75, 97, 220
data transfer 69
databases 157
Date & Time Preferences
screen 196
date formats 185
date preferences 196
Date stamp pick list 116
dates
adding to photos 116
changing event 138
completed tasks and 145,
146
displaying 134, 141
selecting 135
setting due 144
setting system 196
sorting on 91
synchronizing 196
viewing due 145, 146
datestamps 116
Day display options 139
Day View 134, 139
daylight saving time 142
decimal display formats
(calculator) 159
decimal values 159, 185
decompression utilities 161
Default Alarm pick list 141
Default Apps Preferences
screen 189
default settings 188
Default View pick list 139
degrees 159
delays 193
Delete command 83, 121,
163
delete confirmation
messages 92
Delete Contact command
133
Delete events older than pick
list 138
Delete From pick list 163
Delete Memo command 151
Delete Old command 83
Delete Task command 146
deleting
albums 120, 121
alerts 158
applications 17, 162, 163,
224
attachments 79
bookmarks 101
contacts 133
cookies 105
device names 18
email 83, 224
INDEX
247
events 138
files 224
memos 151
messages 91, 92
music from playlists 128
passwords 194
photos 114, 120, 122
playlists 128
tasks 146
video clips 115, 120, 122
desktop software. See Palm
Desktop software;
software
Details button 27
Details command 121
Device Name field 57
device names 18, 57, 166,
209, 227
Bluetooth devices and 57
devices, entering passkeys
and 58
devices. See Bluetooth
devices; hands-free
devices; smartphone
Dial another call prompt 49
Dial button 42
Dial Extra Digits
Automatically option 54
Dial Number dialog box 42
248
INDEX
Dial Pad 31, 39, 60
Dial Pad button 47
Dial Preferences screen 66
dialing 39–42, 47, 65, 103
dialog boxes
accessing command
buttons on 28
defined 227
getting help with 3
highlighted buttons in 26
digital cameras 117
See also camera
dimming keyboard backlight
184, 197
Disable cookies check box
104
Disable JavaScript check box
105
disabling
Add New Number prompt
48
Bluetooth devices 13, 59
cookies 104
Keyguard 37, 190
onscreen buttons 47, 191
synchronization 169
system sounds 183
the touchscreen 189, 191
web page images 98, 105
discovery 166
Discovery icon 107
discovery results list 107
Discovery Results screen
165
discussion groups 3
disk space (smartphone) 224
Display my name in chat
window as entry field 93
Display Options command
139
Display Options dialog box
139
displaying
alerts 157
alternate characters 32
application information
163
application menus 28
applications 187
attachments 81
bookmarks 100
connection status 69, 220
contacts information 41
current date and time 141
due dates 145, 146
email messages 81
error messages 226
event categories 140
events 61, 134, 139, 140
items in pick lists 29
on-device guide 2
overdue tasks 134
personal calendar 134
photos 116, 117, 122
private entries 194
Quick Tour 2
signal strength 69
slide shows 118
tasks 139, 145, 146
unread messages 71,
134, 139
video clips 116, 118, 122
video recording time 114
voicemail messages 69
web addresses 104
web pages 97, 99
DOC files 149
documentation 1, 2, 25, 75
Documents application 149–
150
Documents icon 150
Documents To Go icon 150
Documents To Go software
149
downloading
applications 102, 161
attachments 81
email messages 84
files 101, 160
ringtones 61
support information 3
Downloads bookmark 102
downward-pointing arrows
29
drafts 79, 89
Drafts button 79
drained battery icon 12
draining the battery 10, 11,
12
Draw on Photo command
114
drawing tools 114
drivers 173
Due Date pick list 144
due dates 144, 146
E
earpiece 7, 46
eBooks 17
echoes 216
Edit Bookmark List dialog box
101
Edit Bookmarks command
100, 101
Edit Favorites Button
command 54
Edit Favorites Pages
command 53, 55
Edit Playlist dialog box 128
edit screens 28
editing. See changing
Effects pick list 116
email
accessing 75, 78–88, 198
adding multiple addresses
to 54
adding signatures 87
attaching photos to 79,
114, 119
attaching ringtones 80
attaching videos to 79,
115, 119
attaching voice memos to
153
creating 78, 97
customizing 84–87
defining favorite buttons
for 54
deleting 83, 224
dialing from 41
downloading 84
forwarding 82
removing attachments for
79
replying to 82
INDEX
249
requirements for 1
resending 79
retrieving 81
scrolling 81
scrolling through 26
selecting default
application for 188
sending 79, 90, 97
setting alerts for 85
sort options for 83
storing attachments 224
synchronizing 174
troubleshooting 220
viewing attachments 81
viewing status of 82
viewing unread messages
for 134, 139
email accounts
changing 84
setting email preferences
and 84
setting up 77, 87
email application 75
email applications 188, 222
Email button 7, 33
email options 78, 83
emergency calls 66, 70, 191
emoticons 89
empty battery icon 12
250
INDEX
empty time slots 139
emptying Trash folder 83
Enable background play
check box 127
encryption 66, 97
Eng(x) display format 159
engineering notation 159
entering
alternate characters 31, 32
decimal values 159, 185
device names 18, 57, 209
email addresses 78
events 135, 136, 137
information 15, 195
lock codes 191, 192
numbers 31, 158
passkeys 56, 58, 107
passwords 45, 193, 194
phone numbers 39–42,
61, 191
tasks 143
text 30, 151
URLs 104
web addresses 99
entries. See information
entry screens 26, 194
envelope icon 83
erasing information 208
error messages 226
errors 211, 218, 226
Escalate ring tone volume
check box 62
EVDO broadband technology
228
EVDO connections
troubleshooting 221
viewing status of 69
EVDO services 69, 222
event conflicts 139
Event Details dialog box 136,
137, 138
events
changing 138
color-coding 138
creating 135, 136
deleting 138
displaying 61, 134, 139,
140
scheduling repeating 137
setting alarms for 136,
140
synchronizing 134, 174
troubleshooting 214–215
viewing categories of 140
viewing duration of 139
Evolution Data Optimized
(EVDO) technology 228
Excel spreadsheets 73, 80,
149
Exchange ActiveSync 87
Exchange Address Book 213
Exchange Servers 87
expansion card slot 8, 175
expansion cards
accessing items on 177
adding 175
beaming from 167
caution for 17, 179
copying applications to
178, 179
copying music to 125
copying photos or videos
to 119
deleting applications on
162
displaying albums on 117
downloading to 101
formatting 178, 179
inserting 175, 176
installing applications on
162
managing files on 177
moving files to 17
opening applications on
177, 224
opening files on 150
renaming 179
sending attachments to 82
storing information on 17,
155, 175
transferring applications
from 178
viewing information about
178
extensions (phone) 47, 54
Extra Digits button (Active
Call View) 47
Extra Digits option (Add
Favorites) 54
F
fade setting 139
Fast Mode (web browser)
98, 105
favorite buttons
adding 52–54
defined 228
dialing with 41
editing 54
organizing 55
specifying number of 61
transferring to smartphone
53
Favorites pages 41, 54, 61
features (Treo smartphone)
7–9
feedback 216
fields 26, 29
file types
pictures 117
videos 118
files
accessing 149, 198
attaching to email 80
browsing 177
deleting 224
downloading 101, 160
moving to expansion cards
17
opening 150
saving 150
streaming 102
transferring 16, 224
Files application 177
financial calculator 158
financial functions 159
Find dialog box 157
Find More button 157
Find Text on Page command
103
finding
chat sessions 92
contacts 40, 61, 132
INDEX
251
specific characters 157
text 103, 157
web pages 99
firewalls 198
5-way navigator 7, 25, 26,
190
Fixed display format 159
Flash mode 51
flight mode 38
Float display format 159
folder pick list 83
folders 91, 209, 213
switching between email
83
Font command 98
Font size pick list 184
fonts 98, 184
forgetting passwords 192,
195
Format Card command 179
Formats Preferences screen
185
formatting expansion cards
178, 179
forums 3
forwarding
email 82
phone calls 51
252
INDEX
freeing disk space
(smartphone) 224
freeing memory 105, 162,
224
freezes 201, 204
From pick list 178
full charge (battery) 10
G
Game Volume pick list 183
getting started 2, 13
GIF files 117
Glossary 227
GPS receivers 109
gradients 159
graphics. See images
grouping photos or videos
117
groupware 87
H
HAC setting 68
hands-free devices
adding 59
connecting to 56
entering passkeys for 58
passkeys and 58
receiving phone calls and
58, 59
troubleshooting 218–220
Hands-free Preferences
screen 59
Hands-free Setup button 57
Hang Up All button 46
hanging up phone 43, 46, 49,
50
hard resets 192, 204
hardware 1
headphones 123
headset button 44, 56
headset jack 8
headsets
See also hands-free
devices
Bluetooth devices and 57,
106
connecting to smartphone
55–56
entering passkeys for 109
receiving calls and 43, 44,
46
hearing-impaired services 67
help 2, 199, 226
hexadecimal characters 159
Hide Records option 194
hiding
blank time slots 139
information in entry
screens 194
Pics&Videos toolbar 118
private entries 194
web browser toolbar 103
High Priority command 89
highlighted buttons 26
highlighting
applications 34
favorite buttons 41
items in pick lists 29
items on screen 26
menu items 28
phone numbers 42
text 27, 103
web links 27, 98
hints 193
History command 103
History list 103
Hold button 46, 49
holidays 137
home city 141
home page 104
home page icon 99, 104
HotSync Log 211
HotSync Manager 173, 228
HotSync manager 172
HotSync Manager icon 172,
210
HotSync Setup button 171
HotSync technology 228
hypertext links. See web
links
I
icons 99, 187
Ignore button 44
Ignore with Text button 44
image file types 102, 117
images
disabling web page 98,
105
downloading 102
saving 102
selecting as wallpaper 60
transferring 17, 224
troubleshooting 222
importing phone numbers
144
Inbox 27, 81, 94
Inbox icons 82
Incoming dialog box 86
incoming messages 94
incoming phone calls 43, 49,
60, 190
incompatible applications 17,
201
Incompatible Apps directory
16
indicator light 7, 11, 12
Info command 17, 163
Info screens 163
information
accessing 192
backing up 17, 21, 205
beaming 167
changing 15
entering 15, 30–31, 195
erasing all 208
hard resets and 192
losing 179, 192, 205
marking as private 194–
195
masking 189, 194
protecting 189, 192
receiving over Bluetooth
connections 165
sending over Bluetooth
connections 164
storing 17, 155, 175, 224
synchronizing 15, 19, 21,
168–174, 212
transferring 16, 22, 166
updating 15, 21, 155
infrared port
beaming from 167, 168
INDEX
253
defined 228
location of 8
synchronizing with 173,
210
infrared transmission 228
inserting expansion cards
175, 176
installer 160
installing
applications 160–162,
201, 229
bonus software 22, 160
Palm Desktop software
16, 161, 203
smartphone battery 9
synchronization software
15, 19
third-party applications
224
VPN clients 198
interference 217, 219
international characters. See
alternate characters
international clock. See
World Clock
international settings. See
language settings
254
INDEX
Internet
See also web browsing;
websites
connections 98, 106
installing applications from
160
troubleshooting 221
interruptions 226
Into album pick list 120
invalid characters 89
IR port
beaming from 167, 168
defined 228
location of 8
synchronizing with 173,
210
items in pick lists 29
items on screen
activating 27
highlighting 26
selecting 27
iTunes 123, 124, 126
J
Java applets 97
JavaScript elements 105
JPG files 117
K
keyboard
accessing alternate
characters on 31
dialing with 39
entering information from
30–31
illustrated 30
incremental searches
from 40
locking 189
restoring factory defaults
188
keyboard backlight 30, 184,
197
Keyguard 189, 190
Keyguard Preferences
screen 190
Known Caller pick list 62
L
Label color pick list 93
language selection screen
10, 19
language settings 185, 203,
205
laptops 172, 173
large attachments 224
length functions 159
liability ii
lightning bolt icons 12, 70
Li-ion battery 228
See also battery
links 90
See also web links
list screens
See also pick lists
accessing command
buttons on 27
highlighting items in 27
selecting items on 26
list view (applications) 187
listening to
music 123, 127
voice captions 117
voice memos 152
Lithium ion battery 228
loading web pages 90, 105,
222
Local button 172
locating
chat sessions 92
contacts 40, 61, 132
specific characters 157
text 103, 157
web pages 99
Location icon 67, 70
Location On option 67
locations, disabling/enabling
transmission of 67
Lock & Turn Off option 194
lock codes 191, 192
Lock Device dialog box 193
lock icon 98, 119, 165, 167
locking
keyboard 189
phone 191–192
touch-sensitive features
190
Treo smartphone 192,
193
logging in to corporate
servers 198
logic functions 159
looking up contacts 53
Lookup button 53
loops 204
losing
information 179, 192, 205
passwords 192, 195
Lost Password option 195
low coverage areas 216
lowercase letters 30
M
M4V files 118
Mac systems
installing applications from
161
installing synchronization
software on 19
installing to expansion
cards and 162
listening to music and 123
removing applications and
163
requirements for 15
synchronization defaults
for 21
synchronizing with 170,
174, 210, 211
transferring music from
123, 124, 126
uninstalling desktop
software and 211
upgrading and 18
user folders on 202
magnet 8
mail. See email
Mail Service pick list 77
Manage Playlists command
128
map (World Clock) 142
maps (web pages) 222
INDEX
255
marking information as
private 194–195
marking private contacts 132
Mask Records option 194
masks 189, 194
mathematical constants 159
mathematical functions 159
maximizing battery life 12,
38, 197
media features 13
Media Player 123, 125, 126
memory
freeing 162, 224
freeing for applications
224
purging old events 138
setting limits 105
memory slots (calculator)
159
memos
See also notes
creating 151
deleting 151
recording 151
scrolling through 26
Memos application
changing fonts for 184
entering text in 151
opening 33, 151
256
INDEX
overview 147
removing memos with
151
synchronizing information
in 21
Memos button 151
Memos list 27
Menu button 7
menu items 28
Menu key 28, 30
menu shortcuts 28
menus 28
Message command 43
message lists 91
Message Tone pick list 94
messages
adding multiple recipients
for 54
arranging in folders 91
chat sessions and 92
checking status of 69, 71
creating 88
defining favorite buttons
for 54
deleting 91, 92
dialing from 41
displaying status of 94
displaying unread 71, 134,
139
including in alerts 92
invalid characters in 89
receiving 89
retrieving 45, 69
saving 89
scrolling through 26
selecting phone numbers
in 42
sending 43, 88, 94
setting colors for 93
setting preferences for
92–94
specifying priority settings
for 89
troubleshooting 220
Messages page
(Preferences) 92
messaging 73
See also text messages
Messaging application
See also text messages
changing fonts for 184
creating chat sessions
from 92
creating text messages
with 88
customizing 92
deleting messages in 91
opening 33
overview 88
sorting messages in 91
status indicators for 94
messaging applications 188
Messaging button 33
Messaging Inbox 27
messaging preferences 92–
94
messaging services 1
messaging, troubleshooting
220
metric values 159
microphone 8, 47, 116
Microphone pick list 116
Microsoft Excel 73, 80
Microsoft Excel
spreadsheets 149
Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync 87, 174
Microsoft Exchange Servers
87, 131, 134
Microsoft Office Manager
See Documents
application
Microsoft Outlook. See
Outlook
Microsoft Windows. See
Windows systems
Microsoft Word documents
73, 80, 149
miniSD
cards 235
expansion card slot 8
mirror 8
mobile networks 216
Month display options 140
Month View 134, 140
Move to command 120
moving
bookmarks 101
favorite buttons 55
moving around on screen 23,
25
moving through web pages
98, 105
MP3 files 125
MP3 formats 123
MP4 files 118
MPEG-4 formats 122
MPG files 118
multi-connector pin 8
multimedia file types 118
multimedia files 117
multiple recipients 54, 88
music
adjusting volume 127
answering phone calls and
43
changing playlists for 128
creating playlists for 128
downloading 102
listening to 123, 127
memory consumption and
224
pausing 127
playing 102, 127
selecting 127
stopping 127
uploading 125
music file types 102
music files 123, 125, 224
music subscription services
123
mute button 47
N
names
sorting on 91
synchronizing and 209
naming
categories 187
device 18, 57, 209
messages for chat
sessions 93
photo albums 113
INDEX
257
photo groups 116
playlists 128
video albums 115
voice memos 152, 153
navigator buttons 7, 25, 26
See also 5-way navigator
networks 216, 221
New Bookmark dialog box 99
New button 27
New Message dialog box 79
Next Song button 127
No Service message 13, 68
Normal Mode (web browser)
98, 105
Note button 132
notes
See also memos
adding to contact
information 132
adding to events 138
adding to tasks 144
scrolling through 26
storing 151
notifications 45, 85
See also alerts
number formats 185
numbers
calculator display options
for 159
258
INDEX
entering from keyboard
31, 158
O
offline synchronization 213
offline viewing (web) 100
OK button 27
online forums 3
online support 3
opening
Alert screen 157
application menus 28
applications 7, 33, 34, 47,
177
Bookmarks View 100
Call Log 42
Dial Pad 39, 47, 60
email applications 222
files 150
History list 103
HotSync manager 172
Pocket Tunes 127
Quick Tour 2
web browser 33, 97
web pages 90, 105, 222
World Clock 142
operating system
(smartphone) 16
operating systems (PCs) 15
Optimized Mode (web
browser) 97, 98
Option button 33
Option key 7, 30, 31, 33, 228
Option key indicator 31
Option Lock indicator 31
Option Lock mode 31, 89
options in pick lists 29
organizer features 1, 13, 21,
229
Outbox 94
Outbox button 79
outgoing messages 94
outgoing phone calls 49
Outlook
duplicate entries in 213
entering information with
15
Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync and 174
multiple appointments and
135
multiple contacts and 131
synchronizing with 20, 21,
169, 213
time zones and 135
Outlook folders 213
overdue tasks 134, 139, 145
owner information 195
Owner Preferences screen
195, 196
P
page icon 94
Page View 100, 103, 104
paired relationship. See
partnerships
Palm Desktop software
defined 228
device names in 227
entering information with
15
forgetting passwords and
195
installing 16, 161, 203
Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync and 175
multiple appointments and
135
multiple contacts and 131
reinstalling 213
synchronizing with 21,
210
time zones and 135
troubleshooting 203, 210
upgrades and 18
Palm folder 113, 114
Palm online support 3
Palm OS software 16
Palm OS-compatible
applications 160
Palm Software Installation
CD 2, 19
paper clip icon 79, 81
paragraphs, selecting 27
partial battery icon 12
partnerships 58, 106, 229
passkeys 56, 58, 107
Password box 193, 195
password hints 193
passwords
caution for 194
changing 194, 195
deleting 194
dialing 47, 54
email and 77, 78
entering 45
forgetting 192, 195
owner information and
195
private entries and 189,
194
smartphone and 192
Paste command 39, 103
pasting
phone numbers 39
text 103
Pause button 127
pausing
music 127
streamed content 103
video playback 116, 118
video recording 116
voice memos 152
PCs. See personal
computers
PDB (Palm OS) databases
160
PDF files 80, 149
pending alerts 90
pending messages 92, 94
personal computers
connecting smartphone to
20
downloading applications
to 161
installing applications from
161
installing synchronization
software on 19
quarantined files on 16,
18, 201
synchronizing with 15, 22
transferring information to
21
INDEX
259
transferring multimedia to
122
transferring music from
125, 126
personal information 129,
189, 192, 195
See also information
personal information
managers 203, 229
personal schedules 133
personalizing smartphone
134, 181
See also preferences
phone
See also phone calls
answering 44, 46
conference calls and 50,
51
dialing 39–42, 47, 103
dialing preferences for 65
getting started with 13
hands-free devices and
55, 58, 59
hanging up 43, 46, 49, 50
locking 191–192
maximizing battery life and
38
privacy settings for 66
selecting alert tones for 63
260
INDEX
selecting ringtones for 61,
62
service carrier for 1
silencing ringer for 44, 183
troubleshooting 216–218
turning on and off 37, 38
viewing Call Log for 42
Phone application
accessing Dial Pad in 39,
47, 60
adding caller IDs 64, 65
customizing 60
dialing from 42
displaying events in 134
enabling privacy settings
from 66
finding contacts from 40
opening 33, 39
overview 35
selecting wallpaper for 60,
121
setting alert tones 63
setting ringtones 61
setting TTY/TDD
connections 67
status icons for 68–71
turning HAC on/off 68
Phone button 7, 33
Phone Call screen 44
phone calls
See also phone; phone
numbers
adding a second 49
adjusting volume for 14,
64, 216
automatically answering
60
disabling screen for 190
ending 43, 46, 49, 50
forwarding 51
keyboard backlight and 30
making 39, 47, 49, 51
placing on hold 46, 49
receiving 43, 49
restrictions for 47
running applications and
47
sending to voicemail 44
switching between active
50, 51
text messages and 90
transmitting location
during 67
viewing status of 49
phone indicator. See indicator
light
Phone Info command 14
Phone Info screen 14
Phone Lock 191
Phone Lock command 191
phone numbers
adding 48
assigning prefix to 65
copying 39
dialing extra digits with 47,
54
entering 39–42, 61, 191
getting device 14
highlighting 27
importing 144
pasting into Dial Pad 39
redialing most recent 42
saving 48
selecting 42
Phone Off message 13, 38,
68
phone on icon 69
Phone Preferences
command 66
Phone Preferences screen
66, 67, 68
photo albums 113, 117, 120
Photo Settings screen 116
photos
See also pictures
adding as wallpaper 121
adding caller ID 65, 131
adding captions to 114
adding to albums 120
adding to contacts 121
backing up 122
copying 119
deleting 114, 122
displaying information
about 121
downloading 102
grouping 117
personalizing 114
positioning on screen 117
removing from albums
120, 121
rotating 121
saving 114
scrolling through 26
selecting as backgrounds
139
sending 79, 114, 119
setting default size 116
setting preferences for
116
storing 111
taking 113, 223
viewing 116, 117, 122
pick lists 26, 29
Pics&Videos application
copying pictures and
videos in 120
creating wallpaper with
121
hiding toolbar in 118
opening 117
organizing media with 120
removing photos or videos
from 121
rotating photos in 121
sending pictures or videos
from 119
synchronizing information
in 21
viewing pictures in 117
viewing slide shows in
118
viewing videos in 118
Pics&Videos icon 117
picture formats 117
Picture list 119
pictures 65, 113, 223
See also images; photos
PIM applications 1, 229
PIMs 203
plain text formats 82
Play button (Pocket Tunes)
127
INDEX
261
Play icon (web browser) 102
playback
pausing 103, 116, 118,
127
resuming 103, 127
stopping 127, 152
playing
music 102, 127
streamed content 102
video clips 115, 118
voice captions 117
voice memos 152
playlists 128
Playlists command 128
plug-ins 97
Pocket Tunes application
changing playlists in 128
creating playlists in 128
opening 125
overview 123, 125
playing music from 127
upgrading 123
POP protocols 86
ports 20
Power Preferences screen
13, 197
Power/End button 7, 37, 38
PowerPoint files 80, 149
PPT files 149
262
INDEX
PRC (Palm OS) applications
160
precautions 232
predefined passkeys 58,
107, 109
preferences
alarm tones 140
alert tones 63
applications 187, 189
buttons 187
calculator 159
camcorder 116
camera 116
country-specific 185
dialing 65
email 84, 86–87
hands-free devices 59
Keyguard 190
messaging 92–94
owner information 195
power settings 197
ringtones 61, 62
system colors 186
system date and time 196
system sounds 183
tasks 146
web pages 104–106
prefixes (phone numbers) 65
Prefs icon 195
preinstalled applications 2,
160, 162
See also applications;
specific application
presentations 149
preset delays 193
preset passkeys 58, 107,
109
pressing keyboard keys 30
pressing onscreen buttons
191
Previous Song button 127
primary applications 33
primary button assignments
188
prioritizing tasks 143, 146
priority levels 143, 146
priority settings 89
privacy flag 144
Privacy Mode check box 92
privacy settings 66
private entries 189, 194–195
programs. See applications
progress indicator bar (video
recording) 116
Prompt sounds pick list 116
protecting personal
information 189, 192
protecting the screen 7, 208
protecting Treo smartphone
189–196
Protocol pick list 77
proxy servers 106
pTunes icon 125
punctuation marks 31, 32
Purge command 91, 138
Purge pick list 91
purging old information 17
Q
quarantined files 16, 18, 201
quick buttons 33, 187
Quick Install 229
Quick Keys 54
Quick Tour documentation 2
QuickText button 89
QuickText phrases 89
R
radians 159
radio frequency emissions
231
random number generator
159
range (Bluetooth devices)
164
Rcl button (calculator) 159
readjusting the screen 185
receiving phone calls 43, 49
recently viewed web page
icon 99
rechargeable battery 1
Record command 167
Record Completion Date
check box 146
recorder 151
recording
ringtones 62
sounds 141
videos 114
voice memos 151
Records button 164
recovering lost passwords
195
recurring events. See
repeating events
red paper clip icon 79
redialing most recent number
42
redirector (websites) 222
reducing storage space 17
Refresh command 221
Refresh icon (web pages) 98
refreshing web pages 98,
221
Regulatory Information 231
reinstalling Palm Desktop
software 213
reinstalling third-party
applications 202, 205
Reminder Sound pick list 141
reminders 136, 143
Remove from album
command 120
removing
albums 120, 121
alerts 158
applications 17, 162, 163,
224
attachments 79
bookmarks 101
contacts 133
cookies 105
device names 18
email 83, 224
events 138
expansion cards 176
files 224
memos 151
messages 91, 92
music from playlists 128
passwords 194
photos 114, 120, 122
playlists 128
tasks 146
INDEX
263
video clips 115, 120, 122
Rename Card command 179
Rename Memo command
153
renaming expansion cards
179
repeat intervals (events) 137
Repeat pick list 137, 141,
144
repeating alarms 141
repeating event icon 137
repeating events 137, 140
repeating tasks 144
replacing smartphone battery
12, 206
rescheduling events 138
resets 201, 204–205, 218,
226
caution for 192
resizing text 98
Resolution pick list 116
resolution settings (camera)
113
restoring factory defaults 188
restricting location
information 67
resuming playback 103, 127
Return key 30
264
INDEX
Review photos/videos pick
list 116
RF emissions 231
ringer
adjusting volume 64
silencing 44
turning off 183
Ringer switch 9, 38, 44, 183
ringtone file types 102
Ringtone pick list 64
ringtone preferences 61, 62
ringtones
assigning to caller IDs 64,
132
downloading 61, 102
recording 62
sending with messages
80
setting for phone 62
setting phone 61, 62
roaming icon 69
Roaming message 68
Roaming pick list 62
Rotate command 121
rotating photos 121
S
Save As command 150
Save as Contact command
121
Save as Wallpaper command
121
Save List button 128
Save Page command 100
saved web page indicator
100
saving
files 150
images 102
messages 89
phone numbers 48
photos 114
playlists 128
video clips 115
voice memos 152
web pages 100
schedules 134
scheduling events 135, 136,
137
Sci(x) display format 159
scientific calculator 158
scientific notation 159
screen
accessing command
buttons on 27
activating items on 27
adjusting brightness 184,
197
aligning 185
automatically turning off
37, 197
battery life and 13
disabling 47, 189, 191
locking 190
moving around on 23, 25
protecting 7, 208
scrolling through 26
selecting items on 27, 29
troubleshooting 207–208
turning on or off 37, 197,
218
waking up 37
screen fonts 184
screen protectors 208
scroll arrows 81
scroll bars 26
scrolling 26, 98
scrolling preferences 105
SD cards 235
SD_Audio folder 126
search results 157
searching for
contacts 40, 61, 132
specific characters 157
text 103, 157
secondary applications 33
secure connections 106
secure web pages 98
secure websites 97, 223
security 58, 195
Security button 193, 194
security certificates 97
Security dialog box 193
security software 189
Select Font dialog box 184
Select Media screen 80
selecting
alarm tones 140
applications 34, 177
chat sessions 91, 92
dates 135
favorite buttons 41
home city 141
items in pick lists 29
items on screen 27
menu items 28
music 127
phone numbers 42
photo albums 117, 119
playlists 128
songs 127
text 27, 105
time zones 135
video albums 118, 119
wallpaper 60, 121
web links 98
self-portrait mirror 8
Send button 7, 42, 79
Send command 165
Send From pick list 165
Send To Device droplet 125
sending
applications over
Bluetooth 165
calls to voicemail 44
email 79, 90, 97
information over Bluetooth
164
messages 43, 88, 94
photos 79, 114, 119
to chat rooms 92
video clips 115, 119
voice memos 153
Sent folder 94
servers 21, 198
service contracts 1
service providers 69, 75, 76
See also wireless service
provider
setting
alarm clocks 142
passwords 45, 193, 194
setting up smartphone 2, 10
INDEX
265
settings (incompatible) 201
Setup Devices button 107,
171
Setup Devices dialog box 57,
171
Shift/Find indicator 30
Shift/Find key 30, 157
Short Messaging Service
(SMS) 229
shortcuts 28, 34
Show Address Bar check box
104
Show Calendar event check
box 61, 134
Show Categories check box
146
Show Category Column
check box 140
Show Category List check
box 139, 140
Show Completed Items
check box 146
Show Due Dates check box
144, 146
Show Due Tasks check box
139
Show Favorite buttons check
box 61
266
INDEX
Show Messages check box
139
Show Priorities check box
146
Show Time Bars check box
139
Show timestamps in chats
check box 93
Show Wallpaper option 60
Shutter sounds pick list 116
Side button 7, 127, 152, 187
Signal faded pick list 63
signal strength 63, 69, 216,
217
signal strength indicator 38
signal-strength icon 38
signatures 87
silencing system sounds 44,
183
silencing the ringer 44
silent alarm 62, 63, 140
silent alerts 93
single carrier (1xRTT) radio
transmission technology
227
SIT files 161
Size button 17, 164
slide show options 119
slide shows 118
slider 26
Slideshow Setting command
119
smartphone
activating 14
adding additional security
for 195
battery life for 12
charging 10, 11, 13
components of 1
connecting Bluetooth
devices to 106, 108
connecting to PCs 20
customizing 134, 181
documentation
conventions for 37
entering passkeys for 58
features illustrated 7–9
freeing memory for 162,
224
freeing space for 224
getting help with 2–3, 199
getting phone number for
14
headsets compatible with
55
locking 192, 193
naming 18, 57, 209
navigating around on 23
overview 1
preset bookmarks on 101
protecting 189–196
required items for 2
resetting 192, 204–205
setting up 10
specifications for 235
storing 7, 8
synchronization defaults
for 21
synchronizing 15, 18
third-party applications and
225
transferring data to 17, 21
troubleshooting 3, 199,
217
turning on and off 10
unauthorized users and
189
updating information on
15, 21
viewing signal strength for
69
SMS messaging services
220, 229
See also text messages
soft resets 168, 204
software
See also Palm Desktop
software
accessing from web
browser 102
included with smartphone
1
installing 22, 160
managing 149
reinstalling 213
synchronization defaults
for 21
synchronizing information
and 19
troubleshooting 203
uninstalling 211
updating 201
software conflicts 211
songlists. See playlists
songs. See music
Sort by check box 146
Sort by Date command 91
Sort by Name command 91
Sort command 91
sorting
messages 83
sorting messages 91
sorting tasks 146
Sound & Alerts Preferences
screen 140, 183
Sound Off 9
Sound Off position (ringer)
44, 183
Sound On position (ringer)
183
sound preferences 140
sounds 141, 183
Sounds button 183
Space key 30
speaker 8
speakerphone 46, 47, 216
special characters 31, 32, 89
specifications 235
speech-impaired services 67
speed-dialing buttons 41
Spkr-phone button 46
spreadsheets 73, 80, 149
Start With pick list 100
static 217, 219
statistical functions 159
statistical information 163
status icons (email) 82
status icons (phone) 68–71
stereo adapters 56, 123
stereo headphones 123
Sto button (calculator) 159
INDEX
267
stopping
music playback 127
video recording 115
voice memo playback 152
storage solutions 155
storage space 17
storing
information 17, 155, 175,
224
music files 126
notes 151
photos 111, 113
smartphone 7, 8
videos 111, 114
streaming files 102
style sheets 98, 105
stylus 8, 25, 26, 29
submitting web forms 98
support (Palm) 3
support (wireless service
provider) 3
symbols 31, 32, 89
Sync automatically check box
85
sync button 20, 22, 125
sync cable 11, 15, 20
sync. See synchronization;
synchronizing
268
INDEX
synchronization
ActiveSync and 87
Bluetooth devices and 106
device names and 18
overview 155
preparing for 15
recommendations for 21
removing applications and
163
selecting applications for
168–171
setting default application
for 188
troubleshooting 208–215
upgrading and 18
synchronization applications
(third-party) 205, 209, 212
synchronization software 15,
19, 203
synchronizing
Calendar events 134, 174
contacts 131, 174
dates and time 196
email 174
information 15, 19, 21,
168–174, 212
photos and videos 122
time zones 196
with Bluetooth devices
171, 172
with Microsoft Exchange
ActiveSync 174
with Microsoft Outlook
169
system colors 186
system dates and time 141,
196
system errors 211, 218, 226
system requirements (PCs)
15
system resets 201, 204,
218, 226
system sounds 44, 183–184
System Volume pick list 183
T
taking pictures 113, 223
Tap and Drag check box 105
tapping 25, 26, 27, 29, 208
Task Details dialog box 143
tasks
See also events; Tasks
application
adding 143
assigning to attachments
82
checking off 144
deleting 146
displaying 134, 139, 145,
146
marking as private 144
prioritizing 143, 146
setting alarms for 144,
146
setting preferences for
146
viewing due dates for 145,
146
Tasks application
changing fonts for 184
opening 143
synchronizing information
in 21
Tasks button 143
Tasks list 27, 134, 144, 145,
146
Tasks Preferences screen
146
TDD devices 67
technical support (Palm) 3
technical support (wireless
service provider) 3
telecommunications devices
67
telephone calls. See phone;
phone calls
temperature conversions
159
text
copying 103
entering 30, 151
finding 103, 157
highlighting 27, 103
resizing 98
selecting 27, 105
viewing against photos
139
text fields 26, 29
text message icon 94
text messages
See also messages
addressing 88
checking status of 70, 71
containing links 90
creating 88–89
deleting 91
dialing from 41
retrieving 71, 89
selecting alert tones for 93
sending 44, 88, 89, 91
setting priority of 89
special characters and 89
troubleshooting 220
text messaging service 1
text messaging services 220
Text Telephone devices 67
third-party applications
caution for 188, 201
compatibility with 16
deleting 17, 224
getting help with 162
installing 201, 224
reinstalling 202, 205
searching in 157
transferring to expansion
cards 17
troubleshooting 25, 204,
225–226
third-party utilities 17, 195
third-party VPN client
software 198
three-way calling 49, 50, 51
Thumbnail View 117, 119,
122
TIF files 117
time
displaying video recording
114
scheduling events and
135, 138
setting system 196
synchronizing 196
viewing 141
time bars 139
INDEX
269
time formats 185
time preferences 196
time slots (calendar) 139
Time Zone pick list 135
time zones 136, 196, 214
Timed Events check box 140
timestamps 93
tips 2
Tips command 2
to do items. See tasks
toolbars 103, 118
touchscreen. See screen
Touchscreen Preferences
screen 186
transmitting location 67
Trash folder 83
travel alarm 142
Treo 755p smartphone. See
smartphone
trigonometric functions 159
troubleshooting 3, 199
Trusted Device list 106, 108,
165
trusted devices 106
See also partnerships
Trusted Devices button 107
trusted pairs. See
partnerships
TTY devices 67
270
INDEX
TTY icon 68
TTY/TDD Mode icon 70
TTY/TDD pick list 67
turning on or off
Caps Lock 31
keyboard backlight 30
Keyguard 37, 190
microphone 116
phone 37, 38
screen 37, 197, 218
smartphone 10
speakerphone 46
Typing starts contacts search
option 61
U
unauthorized users 189
Unfiled category 166, 168
uninstalling
applications 162
Palm desktop software
211
third-party applications
204
Unknown Caller pick list 62
unlocking
the keyboard 190
the phone 191, 192
Treo smartphone 192
unread messages 71, 94,
134, 139
untimed events 136, 137,
140
Untimed Events check box
140
updating
application software 201
information 15, 21, 155
upgrades 16–18, 53, 211
troubleshooting 201–202
uploading music files 125
uppercase letters 30
urgent messages 94
URLs 90, 104
See also web links
USB hub 20
USB ports 20
Use color for pick list 93
user discussion groups 3
user folders 202, 209, 229
User Guide 2
usernames 77
V
VersaMail application
accessing email and 75,
220
adding attachments from
79–80
creating email messages
from 78
customizing 84–87
displaying attachments
with 81
documentation for 75
Exchange ActiveSync
accounts and 87
opening 33
overview 75
responding to messages
from 82
setting up accounts for 76,
77
sorting messages with 83
switching accounts from
84
Version button 164
version numbers 164
Vibrate pick list 62, 63, 140
vibrating alarm 62, 63, 140
video albums 115, 117, 120
video file types 102, 118
video recording screen 114
Video Settings screen 116
videos
adding to albums 120
adjusting volume for 115
attaching to email 79, 115
backing up 122
copying 119
deleting 115, 122
displaying information
about 121
downloading 102
grouping 117
jumping to specific
sections of 116
pausing 116, 118
playing 102, 115, 118
recording 114
removing from albums
120, 121
saving 115
sending 115, 119
setting default size of 116
setting preferences for
116
storing 111
viewing 116, 118, 122
View By pick list 187
viewing
alerts 157
alternate characters 32
application information
163
application menus 28
applications 187
attachments 81
bookmarks 100
connection status 69, 220
contacts information 41
current date and time 141
due dates 145, 146
email messages 81
error messages 226
event categories 140
events 61, 134, 139, 140
items in pick lists 29
on-device guide 2
overdue tasks 134
personal calendar 134
photos 116, 117, 122
private entries 194
Quick Tour 2
signal strength 69
slide shows 118
tasks 139, 145, 146
unread messages 71,
134, 139
video clips 116, 118, 122
video recording time 114
voicemail messages 69
web addresses 104
web pages 97, 99
INDEX
271
virtual private networks
(VPNs) 198
Visibility pick list 108, 165
Vista 3, 16, 201, 203
voice captions
adding 114, 121
background music and
119
playing 117
Voice Memo application 147,
151–152
Voice Memo list 152
voice memos 152
voice quality 216
voicemail
checking 69
retrieving messages 45,
69
sending calls to 44
setting alert tones for 63
setting up 44
Voicemail Alert pick list 63
Voicemail button 45
Voicemail icon 45, 69
voicemail page icon 94
Voicemail screen 45
volume
alarm tones 140
alert tones 63
272
INDEX
music 127
phone 14, 64, 216
ringer 64
ringtones 62
video clips 115
voice memos 153
Volume button 7, 14, 64
volume conversions
(calculator) 159
Volume pick list 62, 63
volume preferences 183
VPN client software 198
W
waking up screen 37
wallpaper 39, 60, 121
warranty 2
web addresses 99, 104
See also URLs; web links
web browser
accessing email providers
and 75
auto-completion options
for 104
beaming from 167
bookmarking and 99, 101
customizing 104–106
deleting cookies for 105
dialing phone numbers
from 42, 103
hiding toolbar in 103
installing applications from
160
opening 33, 97
overview 95, 97
restrictions for 97
selecting default views for
100
selecting home page for
104
streamed content and 102
troubleshooting 221
unsupported elements for
222
web browser application.
See Blazer web browser;
web browser
web browser icons 98
web browsing
See also web browser
from smartphone 38, 97
memory consumption and
224
requirements for 1
secure sites and 97, 98
selecting default
application for 188
troubleshooting 220–223
web browsing service 1
web forms 98
Web icon 97
web links
assigning to favorite
buttons 54
creating email from 97
highlighting 27
Palm online support 3
selecting 98
web pages
accessing 97, 99, 221
bookmarking 99–101
caching 105, 224
changing fonts for 98, 184
changing layouts for 98
copying text from 103
dialing from 41
disabling images for 98,
105
displaying 97, 99
finding text on 103
loading 105, 222
locating most recent 99
opening from text
messages 90
opening History list for
103
refreshing 98, 221
saving 100
scrolling 98, 105
selecting text on 103, 105
sending email from 97
setting initial view for 104
setting preferences for
104–106
viewing offline 100
web-based email 75
websites 38
See also web browsing
accessing 97, 99, 106,
223
displaying addresses for
104
displaying recently visited
99
downloading files from
101
entering addresses for 99
opening Palm online
support 3
redirectors and 222
transactions and 223
Week View 134
weekly events 134
weight conversions 159
Wide Page Mode 98
Windows systems
installing applications from
161
installing to expansion
cards and 162
listening to music and 123
removing applications and
163
requirements for 15
sending email and 84
synchronization defaults
for 21
synchronizing with 169,
173, 210, 211
transferring music from
123, 126
Windows Vista 3, 16, 201,
203
wireless accounts. See
accounts; wireless service
provider
wireless connections 95,
164
wireless devices. See
Bluetooth devices;
hands-free devices;
smartphone
wireless features 13, 225
INDEX
273
wireless service provider
customer service for 3
onscreen message 68
preset bookmarks and 101
smartphone requirements
for 1
technical support for 3
troubleshooting Internet
connections and 221
voicemail services and 44
274
INDEX
wizards 160
WMA formats 123
Word documents 73, 80,
149
word searches 157
words, selecting 27
World Clock 141–142
World Clock icon 142
world map 141
Wrap Search check box 103
X
XLS files 149
Y
Year View 134
Z
ZIP files 160, 161
zoom settings (camera) 113